You are on page 1of 294

Technical

Publications

Direction 2136597–100
Revision 8

GE Medical Systems
HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL

CopyrightE 1998 by General Electric Company

ADVANCED SERVICE DOCUMENTATION


PROPERTY OF GE
FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY
NO RIGHTS LICENSED – DO NOT USE OR COPY
DISCLOSURE TO THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED.
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Class C
Permission to use this Advanced Service Software and related documentation (hereinafter
called the “Material”) by persons other than GE Medical Systems employees is provided
only under an Advanced Service Package Limited License relating specifically to this
Proprietary Material. This is a different agreement from the one under which normal
operating and basic service software is licensed. A license to use operating or basic
service software does not extend to or cover this software or related documentation.
If you are a GE Medical Systems employee or a customer who has entered into such a
license agreement with GE Medical Systems to use this proprietary software, you are
authorized to use this Material according to the conditions stated in your license
agreement. However, you do not have the permission of GE Medical Systems to alter,
decompile or reverse–assemble the software, and unless you are a GE employee, you
may not copy the Material. The Material is protected by Copyright and Trade Secret laws;
the violation of which can result in civil damages and criminal prosecution.
If you are not a party to such a license agreement of a GE Medical Systems employee, you
must exit this material now. To exit software, press the keyboard’s “F” key while holding
down the “alt” key, then the “X” key .
If you have a license agreement with GE Medical Systems for the use of this material,
proceed.

0–2
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 4 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

D THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.


WARNING D IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER
THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE
TRANSLATION SERVICES.
D DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
D FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE
PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL
OR OTHER HAZARDS.

D CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.


AVERTISSEMENT D SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE
LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE
TRADUIRE.
D NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.
D LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES
DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.

D DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN


ENGLISCHER SPRACHE.
WARNUNG
D FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT,
IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG
ZU SORGEN.

D VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERÄT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES


KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN
WURDE.

D WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN


DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN
DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.

D ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.


AVISO D SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA
QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN
SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIÓN.
D NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER
CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.

D LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL


PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN
LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE OTRA
NATURALEZA.

0–3
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 4 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

D ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA


DISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS.
ATENÇÃO
D SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A
GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.
D NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.
D O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA
DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS,
MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.

D IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE


SOLTANTO IN INGLESE.
AVVERTENZA
D SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL
MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE
DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
D SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO
AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL
CONTENUTO.
D NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA
MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER
FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.

0–4
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 4 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION


X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein contained
should be thoroughly read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment before you attempt to
place this equipment in operation. The General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, will be glad to
assist and cooperate in placing this equipment in use.
Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the useful beam, no
practical design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical design compel the operator to
take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to
radiation.
It is important that everyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully acquainted with the
recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements as published in NCRP Reports
available from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the
International Commission on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect against injury.
The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, its agents,
and representatives have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment.
Various protective material and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used.

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be
performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed
by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing shall
be performed by qualified GE Medical personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are
highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required. In performing all electrical work on these products,
GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the
requirements of the applicable electrical codes.

The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE field engineers, personnel of third-party
service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.

DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation “damage in
shipment” written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a General
Electric representative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the
carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held
for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested
within this 14 day period.

Call Traffic and Transportation, Milwaukee, WI (414) 827–3449 / 8*285–3449 immediately after damage is found. At
this time be ready to supply name of carrier, delivery date, consignee name, freight or express bill number, item
damaged and extent of damage.

Complete instructions regarding claim procedure are found in Section “S” of the Policy & Procedure Bulletins.
6/17/94

0–5
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 4 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

Customers, please contact your GE Sales or Service represenatives.


GE personnel, please use the GEMS CQA Process to report all omissions, errors, and defects in this
documentation.

0–6
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

REVISION HISTORY
REV DATE REASON FOR CHANGE
0 13 February 1996 Initial Release
1 April 1996 Header changed on all pages to match class C, 3.4 Software, Section 2 – Console Power
Panel to Ps, Section 5 – Options re–boot, Intercom adjustment, Section 8 – TOC page numbers,
Section 9 – Z–Align tube position, Section 10 – Monitor Enable.
2 18 Sept 1996 Added Steering Guide. Section 3 – A4 changed to A3 Ground Bus. Section 5 – SBC timezone
config. Section 6 – data entry hint. Section 10 – remove teflon pin spec. CDROM compatibility
release. 3.5 Software. Section 13 – Removed.
3 20 Jan 1997 Section 2 – Removed PDU 2113764. Section 3 – Removed PDU 2113764. Section 4 –
Removed PDU 2113764. Section 5 – Moved Touch Calibration, Added 20E03 Monitor
Adjustment. Section 8 – Typographic Corrections. Section 10 – Enhanced GE Performance
Phantom Specifications, Added Cine to System Test, Clarified 48cm Protocol selection. Section
12 – Corrected Tube Retest.
4 14 July 1997 3.6 Software. Section 2 – Added brace to desktop. Section 3 – Corrected EMC 110v Gantry
Connection. Section 5 – Removed monitor set–up for type 20E01, Moved change tube to
optional. Section 8 – Added MX200 Tube changes. Section 9 – Removed Detector Output.
Section 11 – Added MX200 Tube changes.
5 12 Sept 1997 Section 5 – Made monitor adjustment generic, Added shutdown/startup for timeslave bug.
Section 10 – Added Hot ISO, Added 0.8 second protocols. Section 11 – Corrected format for
Adobe.
6 12 Oct 1997 Section 5 – Added new set time procedure. Section 11 – Copied 46–000030F4879X into this
section. Section 12 – Removed section and added a note in table of contents to reference
Advanced System Service Manual 2152922 for retest of components.
7 28 Apr 1998 Octane ME2 Release. Section 1 – Added New Keyboard Top Install. Section 2 – Added
Octane console install wiring. Section 10 Removed Appendix A, Clarified HV Streak Spec.
8 30 Nov 1998 Octane M4 5.3 Release. Section 1 – Corrected illustration headers, added mechanical install
process improvements. Section 2 – mechanical install process improvements, removed
dyna–plan cable. Section 4 – Power–Up. Section 5 – Added Smart Trend reset. Section 6 –
Tilt, Table Elevation and Collimator charct made appendix, SixSigma Project #1323. Section 7 –
Eliminated electronic diagnostics as part of process improvement. Sections 8 and 9 swapped.
Section 10 – Removed GE Performance Phantom.

i
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION


NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER

0–1 to 0–2 8 5–1 to 5–24 8 10–1 to 10–50 8

0–3 to 0–6 4 6–1 to 6–22 8

i to xvi 8 7–1 to 7–2 8 TAB REVISION


11 NUMBER
1–1 to 1–40 8 8–1 to 8–22 8
11–1 to 11–2 4
2–1 to 2–52 8 9–1 to 9–30 8 11 – F4879X 4

3–1 to 3–10 8

4–1 to 4–6 8

This Document includes a copy of document 46–000030F4879X in TAB 11.

INTRODUCTION

This book has 11 Chapters which contain the information, functional checks and system tests used to complete the
installation and staging of the CT System. Each Chapter contains tests and reference appendices.

If your system has additional options, we recommend running the option cables when you cable the system. However,
leave the option(s) unhooked until the system has passed the image series.

ii
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER A – Steering Guide

CHAPTER 1 – Position Subsystems

CHAPTER 2 – Install Power, Ground and Interconnect Cables

CHAPTER 3 – System Continuity and Ground Checks

CHAPTER 4 – PDU Integration

CHAPTER 5 – Computer Integration

CHAPTER 6 – Table/Gantry Integration

CHAPTER 7 – DAS Integration

CHAPTER 8 – Alignments

CHAPTER 9 – Generator Calibration

CHAPTER 10 – System Tests

CHAPTER 11 – F4879

iii
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

TABLE OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Illustration 1–21 Install Table Footswitch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–30
Illustration 1–26 Operator Console Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–35
Illustration 1–25 Console Stabilizer Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–34
Illustration 1–27 Console Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–36
Illustration 1–28 Attach Keyboard to Table Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37
Illustration A–1 Gantry Front Shroud Hinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–39
Illustration A–2 Hinge Pin Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–39
Illustration A–3 Rear Cover Hinge Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–40
Illustration 2–3 Excess Cable Storage Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
Illustration 2–5 Computer Carrier Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
Illustration 2–6 Back Bulkhead Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
Illustration 2–7 Display Monitor Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
Illustration 2–8 Rx Monitor Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
Illustration 2–25 Gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–29
Illustration 2–26 A1A5 Panel, Detail A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–29
Illustration 2–27 EMC Gantry – Detail B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–30
Illustration 2–28 Non–EMC – Detail B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–31
Illustration 2–29 HiSpeed Advantage Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–32
Illustration 2–30 A2A7 Panel – Detail A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–32
Illustration 2–31 PDU Area Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–33
Illustration 2–32 HVDC Supply Output Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34
Illustration 2–33 Axial Servo Amp Panel Output Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–35
Illustration 2–34 A3 Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–36
Illustration 2–35 Input Power Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–37
Illustration 2–36 A4 Panel (Bottom View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–38

iv
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

TABLE OF ILLUSTRATIONS –continued–


Illustration 2–37 X–Ray Warning Light and Door Interlock Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–39
Illustration 2–38 System Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–40
Illustration 2–40 Non–EMC HiSpeed CT/i Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–45
Illustration 2–41 EMC HiSpeed CT/i Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–46
Illustration 4–1 PDU 2133533 Area Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
Illustration 4–2 PDU 2133533 Tap Positions (Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
Illustration 4–3 PDU 2133533 Control Board (A6 Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
Illustration 5–1 Service Key Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
Illustration 6–1 Laser Warning and Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–8
Illustration 6–3 Measure Elevation Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–22
Illustration 6–2 Cradle Characterization Pin Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–12
Illustration 8–1 System Alignment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2
Illustration 8–2 Gantry Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3
Illustration 8–3 Plane of Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–9
Illustration 8–4 Detector Masking Plate Orientation (HiLight System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–12
Illustration A–1 Radial Alignment Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–19
Illustration A–2 Rotational Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–20
Illustration A–3 Mounting/Adjustment Hardware (Detail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–21
Illustration 9–2 Chapter Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–2
Illustration 9–3 kVp Evaluation Tool Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–8
Illustration C–1 Bleeder Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–16
Illustration C–2 kVp Evaluation Tool Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–20
Illustration D–1 Rise and Fall Time Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–25
Illustration E–1 OBC Board Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–27

v
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

TABLE OF ILLUSTRATIONS –continued–


Illustration 10–1 System Test Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–2
Illustration 10–2 Cal List/Select Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–4
Illustration 10–3 Detailed Calibration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–5
Illustration 10–4 Detailed Calibration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–6
Illustration 10–5 Protocol List (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–8
Illustration 10–7 Adjust Window Width/Level with Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–20
Illustration 10–8 Reposition ROI with Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–21
Illustration E–1 Teflon Pin Artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–33

vi
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

LIST OF TABLES
Table 2–1 System Component Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
Table 2–2 Cable Color Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
Table 2–3 System Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–40
Table 2–4 System Interconnect Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–43
Table 4–1 PDU 2133533 Line Tap Connection Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
Table 10–1 Small Cal N # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–9
Table 10–2 Large Cal N # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–10
Table 10–3 Phantom Self Calibration Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–12
Table 10–4 N Number Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–13
Table 10–5 Tomographic Plane Indication Scan Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–14
Table 10–10 Exposure Time Accuracy Scan Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–29
Table 10–6 System Scanning Test Scan Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–15
Table 10–7 CT/i Image Series Scan Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–17
Table 10–8 Image Series QA Scan Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–19
Table 10–9 Heat Soak and Seasoning Scan Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–28
Table D–1 Streak Test Scan Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–30
Table E–1 Teflon Pin Scan Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–31
Table E–2 0.5mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
At ISO 10–32
Table E–3 5cm Below ISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–32

vii
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

SECTION A.
HSA CT/I SYSTEM INSTALLATION STEERING GUIDE

This Installation Steering Guide is to only be used as a general guide and


completion checklist for the system installation. Only the installation
manual contents shall be used to complete the installation of the HSA
CT/i System.

i. Steering Guide Use


Each step of the steering guide will be initialed by the installation engineer, showing
completion of the major installation steps. Steps need not necessarily be followed in
order, and any step that does not apply to that particular installation must be marked
N\A.

viii
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

(2) Power,/Ground
(1) Position Subsystems Interconnect Cables
(a)Table/Gantry (a)Electrical
Install Inspection

(b)Assembly and (b)Console Wiring


Installation of
Gantry Display

(c)Table Footswitch (c)Gantry Panels and


Assembly Cable Connections
Installation

(d)Positioning & (d)Table and A7


Mounting of PDU Panel Connections

(e)Installation of (e)PDU Cable


Gantry/Table Connections
Pushbutton
Controls

(f)Operator Console (f)System Ground


Installation Connection

GO TO
NEXT PAGE

ix
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

(3) Continuity and Ground Checks (4) PDU Integration

(a)Site Ground (a)PDU Initial


Impedance Check Configuration

(b)Site Ground (b)Suite Emergency


Current Check Stop Check

(c) System (c)Line Transformer


Continuity and Taps
Ground Checks

(d)Site Ground (d)System Power Up


Continuity Check

GO TO
NEXT PAGE

x
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

(5) Computer Integration

(a)Install Service (f)Install Options


Key

(b)Console (g)Verify Options


Power Up

(c)Keyboard (h)Restore System


Configuration State

(d)Check / Set Date (i)Monitor Setup


and Time

(e)Re–Config GO TO
NEXT PAGE

xi
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

(6) Table/Gantry Integration

(d)Intercom Check

(a)550VDC Enable (e)Elevation


Switch Test Characterization

(b)Alignment Light (f)Cradle


Position Check Characterization

(c)Alignment Light (g)Interference Test


Visualization

(h)Emergency Stop
Check

GO TO
NEXT PAGE

xii
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

(7) DAS Integration

(a) X–Ray
Verification

(b) DAS Auto–Test

GO TO
NEXT PAGE

xiii
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

(8) Alignments

(a)Site Ground (g)CBF and SAG


Current Checks

(b)Z Alignment GO TO
NEXT PAGE

(c)POR (Plane of
Rotation)

(d)BOW (Beam on
Window)

(e)Z Alignment
Baseline

(f)ISO

xiv
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

(9) Generator Calibration

(a)mA Meter Check

(b)New Tube Seed


Shift

(c)KV Test

(d)Auto mA Cal

(e)X–Ray On Light
Check

(f)Site Ground
Leakage Current
Check

GO TO
NEXT PAGE

xv
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

(10) System Tests

(a)Calibration (f)Image Data Sheets

(b)Table/Gantry (g)System State


Alignment Creation
Procedure

(c)Tomographic
Plane Indication

(11) Form F4879


(d)System Scanning (a)Complete F4879
Test

(e)Image Series

xvi
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

CHAPTER 1 – POSITION SUBSYSTEMS

Usage Note: CT Manufacturing constantly updates this


manual to match product improvements. Use the Installation
book that arrives with the system to install it. Any other
revisions of this manual may not exactly match this system
installation. Use other revisions of this Installation manual for
reference purposes only.

CHAPTER 1 CONTENTS
1–1 Skill Set Needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1–2 Install Table/Gantry Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1–2–1 Floor and Room Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1–2–2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1–2–3 Pre–Installation Template and Site Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1–2–4 Installation Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1–2–5 Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
1–2–6 Required Common Tools and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
1–2–7 Equipment Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
1–3 Install and Level Table/Gantry Without Floor Plates . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
1–3–1 Establish the Room Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
1–3–2 Position the Gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
1–3–3 Level the Gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–10
1–4 Install Gantry Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
1–4–1 Position the Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
1–4–2 Level the Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16
1–4–3 Tighten the Lock Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16
1–4–4 Drill the Remaining Anchor Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18
1–4–5 Redundant Anchor Hole Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20
1–4–6 Install the Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–22
1–4–7 Final Table / Gantry Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23
1–5 Install Table Footswitch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–30
1–6 Position PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31
1–6–1 PDU Seismic Mounting Hole Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31
1–7 Install Gantry/Table Pushbutton Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–32
1–7–1 Gantry Base Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–34
1–8 Install Operator Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–34
1–8–2 Remove Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–35
1–8–1 Attach Stabilizer Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–34
1–8–3 Adjust Table Top Height and Position Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–36
1–8–4 Attach Keyboard Table Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37
Appendix 1A Strip Down Gantry for Restricted Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–38

1–1
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

1–1 Skill Set Needed

Medium / Low
D Completed Installation Training Classes.
D Completed EHS, Lock–out Tag–out and Blood Borne Pathogens classes.
D Measurement and print reading skills.

1–2 Install Table/Gantry Introduction

Note: Signed prints and pre–installation template, work sheets and layout template
should be on site. Contact customer for Pre–Installation Kit.

D This chapter describes how to mount, position and level all HiSpeed Advantage
Subsystems.
D Before you start the installation, make sure the site preparation complies with
the Preinstallation manual.
D If possible, remove the cable boxes from the truck, first. Someone can then run
the cables per Chapter 2 of this manual, while others unload the subsystems
from the truck and/or move them to the CT room.

1–2–1 Floor and Room Preparation

Note: The support areas of the main table and gantry must rest on solid concrete,
or other basic flooring. Resilient tile or carpeting may slowly yield over a
period of time, and disturb the alignment of the table to the gantry.

D No part of the floor surface within the table, gantry, or the two interface areas
between table and gantry, should be higher than the support areas for the table
and gantry.
D The floor structure must withstand the occupied weight of table and gantry, as
well as the individual contact area loading of these components
D The method and placement of anchors, or through bolts, must not reduce the
structural strength of the floor.

Note: If you have to remove the gantry covers in order to move the gantry into the
room, the Appendix on page 1–38 describes the cover removal procedure.

1–2
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

1–2–2 Overview

The following procedure provides detailed instructions to position, level and anchor a
HiSpeed Advantage gantry and table with a floor mounting system designed for
installation without baseplates. HSA CT systems use adjustable leveling pads to
support the gantry and table. The gantry has four leveling pads, and the table has
five leveling pads.
First, use a room–layout template to determine the position of the gantry and table.
Move the gantry into position, then position the table relative to the gantry, with three
alignment bars. Finally, level and anchor the system.
Use the template to position the system and drill the first hole. Drill the remaining
anchor holes with the system in place. This HSA system installation procedure
requires the items listed in section 1–2–4 and 1–2–6.

1–2–3 Pre–Installation Template and Site Print

Use the room–layout paper template, P/N 2106475 (in two pieces), during site
planning. The template shows the location of the gantry and table, along with the
required operating and service clearances. Although the template shows the
locations of the anchor holes (both primary and redundant) for floor structure
considerations, use the templates to locate and drill the first gantry anchor hole
ONLY.

1–2–4 Installation Tool Kit

The installation personnel provide the installation tool kit, P/N 2110953. The took kit
contains the following special tools:
D Guide Pin Bolt, P/N 2106495: use to position the gantry over
its first anchor hole.
D Long Alignment Bar (in two pieces), P/N 2106369: use to position the table,
relative to the gantry.
D Two Short Alignment Bars, P/N 2106368: use to position the table,
relative to the gantry.
D Adjuster Tool, P/N 2107863: use to turn the adjusters, which level the system.
D Drill Bushing, P/N 2106205: use to center and guide the bit when drilling the
anchor holes.
D Vacuum Attachment (funnel), P/N 2110944: use to vacuum debris out of the
anchor holes.
D Spanner Wrench, P/N 2110003: if necessary, use to turn the adjusters after
you anchor the system

1–3
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

1–2–5 Level Check


1. Check the accuracy of the levels:
a. Place the level on a flat surface.
b. Observe the bubble’s specific location within the glass cylinder.
c. Rotate the level 180_ (pivot on the center of the level, to maintain the same
mounting surface) and check the bubble.
D Level Ok to use: If the bubble comes to rest in the same location within the glass
cylinder, you may use the level.
D Unacceptable Level: If the bubble comes to rest in a different location within the glass
cylinder, replace or adjust the level.

1–2–6 Required Common Tools and Supplies


D Masking Tape D 9” torpedo level
D Extension Cord D 1/
2” drive socket wrench
D Shop Vacuum Cleaner D 1/ ” drive 3” long extension
2
D Hammer drill D 1/ ” drive 6” long extension
2
D 1/ ” or 13mm masonry bit, min. 8” long
2 D 9/ ” socket
16
D Hammer D 3/ ” deep well socket
4
D Large straight blade screwdriver D 1
1 /8” socket
D 4 foot level D 11/2” socket
D 1/ ” Allen wrench
8 D 1/ ” drive torque wrench:
2
0–100 N–m (0–100 ft–lbs)
D 3/
8” to 1/2” Adapter D 3/ ” or 1/ ” Drill
8 2
Cordless or Electric
D 3” 3/8” drive Drill Adapter D Side Cutters (Large)
D Channel Locks (Large) D Safety Glasses
D Lock–out / Tag–out, tags and lock
D DVM and Test Leads Rated @ 750 VAC
D Clamp–On Current Probe, Range 0–10 Amps.

1–4
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

1–2–7 Equipment Inventory

A. Mechanical

All mechanical installation material should be contained in a box or boxes labeled:

Mechanical \ Vendor Installed

D Customer contact name, Lead FE and Installation Specialist should be included.


D Customer order should be included in the:

Vendor – Open Me Now Box

B. Calibration

All FE calibration material should be contained in boxes labeled:

FE \ Calibration Material

D FE calibration tools – CD/MOD, 1X Book should be in the:

FE – Open Me Now Box

C. Customer Material

Customer material – Pad, Strap, MOD/CDROM, Documentation and other – should be


located in a box or boxes labeled:

Customer Material

1–5
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

1–3 Procedure to Install and Level Table/Gantry Without Floor Plates

1–3–1 Establish the Room Layout:


1. When you establish the room layout, make sure all the operating and service
clearances shown on the templates exist. Locate the anchor holes, and make
sure they clear structural interference in the floor.
Clean the area, remove carpet/tile flooring as shown on the templates, and
remove any old baseplates. Free the mounting surface of material, which may
interfere with the positioning and leveling of the system.
2. Lay out the two paper templates.
a. Start with the Gantry template; if necessary, align it with any
existing cable trough.
b. Tape the template to the floor.
c. Place the table template over top the Gantry template; align the scan and
table centerlines, and tape the table template to the floor.

Note: Before you drill the First Gantry Anchor Hole: Make sure you have
the appropriate hospital personnel approve the location of the
table/gantry before you start to drill any anchor holes.

3. Anchor the front left corner of the gantry. (Location #1)

See Illustration 1–1.


D If something in the floor, such as the position of reinforcement rods in the
concrete, interferes with this anchor hole position, shift the Gantry (and
templates) to another location.
4. Drill one 13mm (1/2”) diameter, 110 mm (4 3/8”) deep, hole at the location shown
on the gantry template.
D Use safety glasses when drilling hole.
D Important: Drill the hole perpendicular to the floor. While one person drills
the hole, position a second person to watch the relationship between the
drill bit and floor. Make sure the bit remains absolutely perpendicular to the
floor throughout the drilling operation.
D Every 15 or 20 seconds, stop the drill, and clear the hole of debris to
prevent binding of the drill bit.
5. Vacuum all debris from the inside of the hole:
a. Place the funnel tip inside the hole; place the vacuum hose in the funnel.
b. When you finish clearing the anchor hole, vacuum the debris from the
surrounding area.

1–6
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 1–1
FIRST HOLE DRILLED LOCATION

GANTRY

DRILL FIRST HOLE AT LOCATION 1.

THIS HOLE IS DRILLED USING THE


TABLE / GANTRY LAYOUT
TEMPLATE. IT IS NOT DRILLED
WITH THE EQUIPMENT IN PLACE. Paper Template
TABLE

1–7
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

1–3–2 Position the Gantry:


1. Remove all the transportation packaging, except dollies, from the gantry.
2. Refer to Illustration 1–3.
a. Locate and remove the adjuster shipping bolt from the left front corner of the
gantry base
b. Replace the adjuster shipping bolt with the guide pin bolt, which also
threads into the leveling pad.
3. Wheel the Gantry over the template, and position the guide pin over the hole.
a. Locate the remaining leveling pads, and position them against the base of
the gantry. ( See Illustration 1–2 )
ILLUSTRATION 1–2
ADJUST LEVELING PAD

GANTRY LEVELING PADS STARTING POSITION

b. Use the dollies to evenly lower the gantry, until the guide pin extends into
the hole, and the leveling pads rest approximately 3 mm above the floor.
c. If necessary, use the guide pin and hole as a pivot, and carefully rotate the
gantry into its correct position over the templates.
4. Remove the paper templates from the floor, and discard.
5. Loosen adjuster shipping bolts and locking rings one turn before you
lower the gantry to the floor.
D Loosen the locking rings and shipping bolts so you can “fine tune” the
leveling pads to compensate for slight variations in the floor surface.
6. Gently lower the gantry, until it rests on the floor.

1–8
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

7. Remove the dollies from the Gantry.


8. Remove the guide pin bolt from the left front adjuster.
9. Remove the three remaining adjuster shipping bolts.
ILLUSTRATION 1–3
INSTALLATION HARDWARE

46–208561P147

1” – 14 X 2.75 Black

1–9
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

1–3–3 Level the Gantry:


1. Remember: Wipe the leveling surfaces clean before you level the gantry.
2. Loosen all the adjuster lock rings:
a. Use the spanner wrench supplied with the Alignment Kit.
or
b. Place the screwdriver at an angle, in the slot of the lock ring. Strike the
screwdriver with a hammer, in the direction to loosen the lock ring.
3. Level the gantry:
a. Because the leveling pads rest against the bottom of the base, you have to
raise the gantry from its lowest possible height to level it.
D IF you positioned the gantry in a “valley” on the floor, you may have to raise the gantry to
clear that depression, in order to correctly level the table after you install it.
b. Systematically rotate through the three gantry level locations, Level Location
A, Level Location B, and Level Location C.

See Illustration 1–5.


D Use a 9” torpedo level, and adjuster #1 and #2, to level Location A.
D Use a 4’ level, and adjuster #3 and #4, to level Location B.
D Use a 4’ level, and adjust #1/#2, and #3/#4 to level Location C.
D Each location has two machined extensions welded to the base, to accommodate the 4’
level.
D Make sure the level sits flat on the machined portion of the extensions, without riding up
onto the neighboring fillets or welds.
c. Adjust the gantry leveling pads until you center the bubble on all three Level
Locations at the same time.
D Use the adjusters to level the gantry. ( See Illustration 1–4 ).
D Use the adjuster tool, 11/8” socket and the 1/2” drive socket wrench to turn each adjuster.
D Use the mark on top of the adjuster to aid in incrementing the adjuster’s rotation.
D Turn each adjuster a maximum of 1 turn at a time.
d. Each of the four adjusters must carry a portion of the gantry weight. To
prevent a twisted base frame and/or rocking during normal operation, do
NOT leave unloaded or floating adjusters.

1–10
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 1–4
ADJUSTOR TOOL

ILLUSTRATION 1–5
GANTRY LEVEL LOCATIONS

1–11
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

1–4 Assemble and Install the Gantry Display

Note: You may find it easier to install the gantry display before moving the Table
into position. This allows for access in front of the gantry without
interference from the table.

1. Refer to display installation drawing, provided for reference, with every system.

1–4–1 Position the Table:


1. Remove all the transportation packaging, except dollies, from the table.
2. Wheel the table into its approximate position, relative to the gantry.
3. Remove the following covers. ( See Illustration 1–6 )
a. Remove the table left and right upper side covers.
b. Remove the four side panels; disconnect the ground straps at the
z–channel.
4. Locate the table leveling pads, and position them against the base of the table.
( See Illustration 1–7 )
5. Use the dollies to evenly lower the table, until the leveling pads rest
approximately 3 mm above the floor.

Note: Loosen adjuster shipping bolts and locking rings one turn before you
lower the table to the floor.

6. Loosen the locking rings and shipping bolts so you can “fine tune” the leveling
pads to compensate for slight variations in the floor surface.

1–12
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 1–6
TABLE COVER REMOVAL

Remove left and right side covers.

Remove these 2 panels on both sides.

ILLUSTRATION 1–7
ADJUST LEVELING PAD

TABLE LEVELING PADS STARTING POSITION

1–13
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

7. Remove the table base cover center support bar. ( See Illustration 1–8 )
ILLUSTRATION 1–8
CENTER SUPPORT BAR

Remove this bar

8. Assemble two halves of the long alignment bar, #3:


a. Insert the pin, and rotate the handle to tighten the joint.
D If the joint remains loose, tighten the tip of the expanding pin to increase its diameter, and
try again.
b. Check the serial number on both halves of the alignment bar; make sure the
serial number match.
9. The short alignment bars, #1 and #2, are identical and interchangeable.
10. Refer to Illustration 1–9:
a. Install the short alignment bars first.
b. Pivot the far end of the table until the long alignment bar fits into place.
c. Adjust the position of the table, until the three alignment bars fit into the 3/4”
alignment holes in the gantry base, and the 1/2” alignment holes in the table
base.
d. Fully seat all three bars on their mating surfaces.

1–14
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

11. After you install the alignment bars, lower the table to the floor, and remove the
transportation dollies.
a. Temporarily remove alignment bar #1, to remove the front table dolly.
b. Replace alignment bar #1 after you remove the front dolly.
12. Remove the five adjuster shipping bolts, and loosen the lock rings.

CAUTION Take extreme care to prevent damage to the ETC and CPU PWAs.

Use the 11/2” socket and 6” extension and 1/2” drive.

ILLUSTRATION 1–9
ALIGNMENT BAR LOCATION LOCATIONS

1–15
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

1–4–2 Level the Table:


1. Remember: Wipe the leveling surfaces clean before you level the table.
2. Loosen and unload the Level Location #5 and Level Location #6 adjusters.
3. Use the 4’ level at all three table leveling locations, D, E, F and G.
D Place the level on the machined surfaces of the alignment bars.
D Do NOT rest the level on the radiused surface on alignment bar #3.
4. Because the leveling pads rest against the bottom of the base, you have to raise
the table from its lowest possible height to level it.
5. Check the initial condition of all three Level Locations, and map out the
adjustments needed to level the three locations.
6. Systematically rotate through the remaining level locations, Level Location D,
Level Location E, and Level Location F. ( See Illustration 1–10 )
D Turn each adjuster a maximum of 1 turn at a time.
D Use adjuster #9 to level Location D.
D Use adjuster #8 to level Location E.
D Use adjuster #7 to level Location F.
7. Adjust the table leveling pads until you center the bubble on Level
Locations D, E and F at the same time.

Note: To ensure the Table Base covers will fit see Illustration 1–10.

D Use the adjusters to level the table.


D Use the adjuster tool, 11/8” socket and 1/2” drive socket wrench
to turn each adjuster.
D Use the mark on top of the adjuster to increment the adjuster rotation.

1–4–3 Tighten the Lock Rings:


1. Refer to Illustration 1–10. Recheck Level Locations, “A” through “F”.
D Use Location “G” to verify the table levelness.
D Make sure adjuster Location #1, #2, #3 and #4 all carry a
portion of the gantry weight.
2. Screw down the adjusters at table Locations #5 and #6, until each rests tightly
against its leveling pad.
D Tighten each adjuster a little more than hand tight, but take care not to
unload any of the other table adjusters.
3. Use the spanner wrench supplied with the Alignment Kit.
or
D Use safety glasses.
4. Tighten the lock rings at Locations #1 through #7 with the
hammer and screwdriver.

1–16
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 1–10
GANTRY/TABLE LEVEL LOCATIONS

#8 #9

(Set level across short


alignment bars.)

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
Floor

27 mm +/– 3mm
To ensure the Table Base Covers will fit maintain this distance
between the bottom of the table base and the floor. Check this
distance along the entire table base, the floor may be uneven.

1–17
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

1–4–4 Drill the Remaining Anchor Holes:


1. Remove the gantry scan window.
2. Prop open the top cover.
3. Open both front and rear gantry covers.
4. Use a piece of tape to mark the drill bit depth of 195 mm (711/16”) from the tip of
the 13mm (1/2”) drill bit.
5. Use the 13mm (1/2”) bit to drill the remaining six anchor holes, Location #2
through #7, with the system in place. ( See Illustration 1–12 ).
D Use safety glasses when drilling holes.
a. Place a piece of cardboard over the ETC and CPU PWAs to prevent
damage and dust contamination.
b. Place the drill bushing inside each adjuster, to keep the hole vertical, and
centered, within the adjuster. ( See Illustration 1–11 ).
ILLUSTRATION 1–11
DRILL BUSHING

c. Drill each hole until the mark on the drill bit is even with the top of the drill
bushing.
D Take special care to center the anchor holes in adjuster Location #5, #6 and #7, to
provide maximum lateral alignment capacity when you center the cradle on isocenter
during subsequent system testing.

1–18
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

CAUTION Take care to avoid the actuator motor lead when you drill the Location #7
Anchor hole. Remove the lead, if necessary.

d. Every 15 or 20 seconds, stop the drill, and clear the hole of debris to
prevent binding of the drill bit.
6. Vacuum all debris from the inside of the hole:
a. Place the funnel tip inside the hole; place the vacuum hose in the funnel.
b. If you can, continue to vacuum while you drill, to keep gantry and table as
free of dust contamination as possible.
c. When you finish clearing the anchor hole, vacuum the debris from the
surrounding area.
d. Stop drilling frequently, to vacuum
7. Do not drill anchor holes at Location #8 and #9. These locations help support
the weight, but do not anchor the table into place.
ILLUSTRATION 1–12
LEVELING PAD AND ANCHOR LOCATIONS

1–19
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

1–4–5 Redundant Anchor Hole Locations:


D If you cannot use one of the adjuster anchor holes, due to structural
interference, such as reinforcement bars in the concrete, use its redundant
anchor location, shown in Illustration 1–13.
D Mark the 13mm (1/2”) drill bit with a piece of tape 170 mm (611/16”) from the tip of
the bit, and follow the instructions in Section 1–4–4.

WARNING THE GANTRY REQUIRES A MINIMUM OF FOUR ANCHORS, ONE IN EACH


CORNER. THE TABLE REQUIRES A MINIMUM OF THREE ANCHORS, ONE
EACH AT LOCATION #5, #6 AND #7.

1–20
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 1–13
REDUNDANT ANCHOR LOCATIONS

1–21
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

1–4–6 Install the Anchors:


1. Use only Hilti Kwik–Bolt II anchors, 1/2” diameter by 8” long: P/N 2106573.
2. Remove the three alignment bars, and repack the install kit.
3. Refer to Illustration 1–14. Assemble the anchors before you install them:
a. Add a 1/4” thick washer under the regular anchor washer
b. Position the nut even with the first thread.
c. Place an anchor in each hole.
d. Hammer the anchor downward, to completely insert the anchor in the hole.
e. Leave the anchors loose until the next section is completed.
ILLUSTRATION 1–14
ANCHOR ASSEMBLY

1–22
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

1–4–7 Table / Gantry Final Alignment

Note: This section is for the final alignment of the table to the gantry. The
alignment bars used in the previous sections are for approximate placement
only. This section needs to be performed before the anchor bolts are
tighten to their torque spec of 75 6 N–m (55 5 ft–lbs) and all base
covers installed.

WARNING DO NOT PLACE ANY OBJECT NEAR OR INTO THE X–RAY OPENING. THIS
SLOT MUST NOT BE NICKED, MARRED OR HAVE OBJECTS INSERTED INTO
IT, SEE ILLUSTRATION 1–16.

1. Rotate the Tube / Collimator to the 3 o’clock position, see illustration 1–15.
ILLUSTRATION 1–15
3 O’CLOCK POSITION

LEVEL LOCATION TUBE AND COLLIMATOR AT 3 O’CLOCK

GANTRY FRONT COVER AND TABLE NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY.

1–23
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

WARNING DO NOT PLACE ANY OBJECT NEAR OR INTO THE X–RAY OPENING. THIS
SLOT MUST NOT BE NICKED, MARRED OR HAVE OBJECTS INSERTED INTO
IT, SEE ILLUSTRATION 1–16.

2. Place a bubble level as shown in illustration 1–16 to precisely place the Tube /
Collimator at the 3 o’clock position.
ILLUSTRATION 1–16
LEVEL PLACEMENT

PLACE LEVEL AS SHOWN XRAY OPENING – READ WARNING NOTE

1–24
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

3. Remove the cradle shipping bolt. It is located under the table / cradle assembly
at the foot end of the table. It has a RED TAG attached to it.
4. Unlatch the Cradle, see illustration 1–17.
5. To center the cradle on the drive assembly push the cradle into the gantry to it’s
maximum position and back to just before the latch position 4 times.
6. Move the cradle in a few inches until the black dot on the top side of the cradle
is inside the gantry opening.
ILLUSTRATION 1–17
UNLATCH CRADLE

PUSH HERE TO UN–LATCH CRADLE

1–25
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

WARNING DO NOT PLACE ANY OBJECT NEAR OR INTO THE X–RAY OPENING. THIS
SLOT MUST NOT BE NICKED, MARRED OR HAVE OBJECTS INSERTED INTO
IT, SEE ILLUSTRATION 1–16.

7. Using a ruler measure distance A.


8. Record this measurement as BLACK DOT A on the work sheet, see illustration
1–19.
9. Move the cradle into the gantry to it’s fullest extension.
10. Using a ruler measure distance A.
11. Record this measurement as FULL EXTENSION A on the work sheet.
12. Rotate the Tube / Collimator to the 9 o’clock position.
13. Use a bubble level to position it precisely at the 9 o’clock position..
14. Using a ruler measure distance B.
15. Record this measurement as BLACK DOT B on the work sheet.
16. Move the cradle into the gantry to it’s fullest extension.
17. Using a ruler measure distance B.
18. Record this measurement as FULL EXTENSION B on the work sheet.
ILLUSTRATION 1–18
MEASURE DISTANCE

Collimator Collimator
at at
9 o’clock 3 o’clock

ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ B A
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ

1–26
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 1–19
ALIGNMENT WORK SHEET

ÉÉÉÉÉ
TABLE / GANTRY ALIGNMENT WORK SHEET

ÉÉÉÉÉ BLACK DOT FULL EXTENSION

ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
Spec Spec

ÉÉÉÉÉ A B
| A – B |  10mm
A B
| A – B |  10mm

ÉÉÉÉÉ
3 o’clock 9 o’clock 3 o’clock 9 o’clock
or 0.40 ” or 0.40 ”

ÉÉÉÉÉ or 7/16 ” or 7/16 ”

START
POSITION

#2

#3

Note: The term | A – B | means subtract A from B and take the absolute value of
that subtraction. That means to disregard or remove any negative or minus
sign from the answer. Example: For A=2, B=5, | 2 – 5 | = 3.

19. Perform the equation in the Spec column to determine if the table needs to be
moved.
20. The Table / Gantry are in alignment when both measurements meet the
specification in the table.
21. If the Table is out of Spec adjust the Table and repeat steps 6. through 19. until
both measurements meet the specification.
22. When the Table / Gantry are aligned.
D Tighten all the anchors and torque to 75 6 N–m (55 5 ft–lbs).
D Replace all the table parts you removed during installation, including covers,
ground straps and the center support bar. Install all Table covers.

1–27
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

1–4–8 Remove Gantry Tilt Bracket and Re–assemble Gantry


1. Refer to Illustration 1–20. Remove the gantry shipping bolts and brackets.
2. Close all the Gantry covers, and re–install the scan window.

1–28
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 1–20
GANTRY TILT BRACKETS

Remove this bracket

Remove this bracket

1–29
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

1–5 Install Table Footswitch Assembly

Install the Table Footswitch Assembly, as shown in Illustration 1–21.


ILLUSTRATION 1–21
INSTALL TABLE FOOTSWITCH ASSEMBLY

Locate the two plates attached to Table


the table, 46–297427P1. Install
the braided grounds from the
gantry, under these plates, not to
the ground buss on the footswitch
assembly.

Install Table Footswitch assembly


mounting hardware 10–32 black
oxide screws s/c 61221 (2)

” ”
14
__ 1
__
29 _
+
16 16
(757.2 mm – 760.4 mm) Table Footswitch assembly

Gantry

1–30
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

1–6 Position the Power Distribution Unit


1. Roll the PDU into position on its permanently mounted casters.
2. Leave at least 15.5cm (6”) between the PDU and back wall, to allow cooling air
to circulate.
3. Run the main input power conductors and ground through flexible metal conduit
(attached between the PDU chassis and room ductwork) so you can move the
PDU away from the wall during service.

1–6–1 PDU Seismic Mounting Hole Locations


ILLUSTRATION 1–22
PDU SEISMIC MOUNTING HOLE LOCATIONS

Seismic Bolt Anchor


Locations, Both Sides

1–31
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

1–7 Install Gantry/Table Pushbutton Controls


Refer to Illustrations 1–23 and 1–24.
1. Feed the 3 cables to the Gantry/Table pushbutton controls through the holes in
the front cover.
D Feed 2 cables through the left hole; feed one cable through the right hole.
2. Connect the 3 cables to the two Gantry/Table pushbutton control units.

Note: It does not matter which cable goes to which connector, they are all common.

3. Use the 8 screws and 8 lockwashers, provided, to install the two Gantry/Table
pushbutton control units to the front gantry shroud.
4. Make sure cables are Ty–wraped (See Illustration 1–24) to prevent interference
with the gantry rotating structure.

1–32
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 1–23
GANTRY CONTROL ORIENTATION

Top

Gantry Inside Gantry Outside

ILLUSTRATION 1–24
GANTRY CONTROL – REAR VIEW

Right Side Control Shown

Ty–Rap Cable

Secure with lock washers and


screws, 4 locations.

1–33
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

1–7–1 Gantry Base Covers


1. Install the raceway pan, 46–297624P1, (lower portion of the rear raceway
assembly, 46–297628G1) before you run any cables to the gantry.
a. Use the four sets of screws (46–170015P2) and washers (12–277) to attach
the raceway pan to the rear of the gantry base, at the midway point.
b. If the site uses floor troughs, discard the raceway pan’s cover plate,
46–297627P1
2. Install the rest of the gantry base covers during Chapter 10, after you check the
Table/Gantry alignment.

1–8 Install Operator Console

Note: Use the drill and drill adapter to raise and lower the console dollies. This will
save approximately 45 minutes.

1–8–1 Attach Stabilizer Pads


1. Attach the two pads to the console stabilizers before you remove the console
shipping dollies. (Refer to illustration 1–25)
2. Screw the pads all the way into the legs
3. After you move the console into position, lower the pads until the console no
longer rocks forward.
ILLUSTRATION 1–25
CONSOLE STABILIZER PADS

1–34
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

1–8–2 Remove Front Cover


1. Unlatch the two fasteners at the top corners of the front cover.
2. Rotate the fasteners counter–clockwise, to the 5 o’clock position.
ILLUSTRATION 1–26
OPERATOR CONSOLE FRONT COVER

Rotate
Counter–Clockwise to Unlatch
Un–latched Latched

Latch mechanism requires a 4mm allen wrench.

3. Unlatch the front cover, and slide the top edge forward 1/2 inch.
4. Lift the cover up, and away from the console.

1–35
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

1–8–3 Adjust Table Top Height and Position Console

Refer to Illustration 1–27. The Console normally arrives with the bottom hole on the
Monitor Top aligned with the fourth bolt from the bottom.

Note: For optimum operator comfort, align the bottom hole of the Keyboard Table Top
with the third hole from the bottom, on the Console.

Your site may have different requirements, and you may have to adjust the Monitor Top
and/or Keyboard Table Top up or down from this position.
D Always select a Table Top height that permits the operator to see the patient on
the table.
D Keep the one bolt–hole relationship between the Monitor Top and the Keyboard
Table Top. Fasten the Keyboard Table Top one hole lower then the Console
Table Top, as shown in Illustration 1–27.
When you move the console into its final position, maintain a 2” (5cm) minimum
distance between the console and the wall.
ILLUSTRATION 1–27
CONSOLE POSITION

ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
2”

ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
Minimum

Wall
Keyboard Top: Start with the third hole
from the bottom. Spec 8 1 foot pound
Monitor Top: Start with the fourth hole from the
bottom. Spec 8 1 foot pound

1–36
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

1–8–4 Keyboard Table Top


ILLUSTRATION 1–28
ATTACH KEYBOARD TO TABLE TOP

Attach the Trackball / Mouse cable raceway strip now.

ILLUSTRATION 1–29
ATTACH KEYBOARD TO TABLE TOP

Use spring loaded handles to attach


keyboard top to support arms.

You may want to delay installing the top


until the Octane computer is wired in Section 2.

1–37
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

APPENDIX 1A STRIP DOWN GANTRY FOR RESTRICTED ACCESS

Strip Down Gantry for Restricted Access


Remove the Gantry cover to move it through a 99cm (39 inch) door.
1. Remove gantry shipping dollies, if attached.
2. Lift the top cover, and support it with the bracket.
3. Open the front cover:
a. Release the front cover’s top right strut.
b. Remove the front right side lock bolt
c. Carefully open the front cover.

WARNING THE FRONT COVER WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY 69KG (150 LBS).


USE AT LEAST 3 PEOPLE TO HANDLE THE COVER SAFELY, AND WITHOUT
DAMAGE.

1. Loosen the set screw on the upper and lower hinge pin.
(Refer to Illustration A–1 and Illustration A–2)
2. Remove the upper and lower hinge pins, (lightly tap from the bottom)
(Refer to Illustration A–2)
3. Remove the front cover.
4. Lift the cover to clear the Gantry.
5. Carefully lay cover face down on a protected flat surface.

1–38
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION A–1
GANTRY FRONT SHROUD HINGE
Detail A

Gantry Front Shroud Hinge

ILLUSTRATION A–2
HINGE PIN DETAIL

Hinge Pin

Set Screw
Detail A

1–39
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Remove Rear Gantry Shroud


1. Open the rear cover:
a. Remove the gantry top cover.
b. Disconnect the power cable from the top cover
c. Unscrew the center top cover hinge from the rear shroud.
d. Slide the top cover to the left, to remove the cover
2. Unbolt the rear shroud from the gantry base by removing the four mounting
bolts
3. Push the rear shroud back.
4. Remove the retaining rings from the hinge pins, on the upper right and left sides
of the shroud. (Refer to Illustration A–3).
5. Lift up on the rear shroud to remove it from the gantry.

WARNING THE REAR COVER WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY 55KG (120 LBS).


USE AT LEAST 3 PEOPLE TO HANDLE THE COVER SAFELY, AND PREVENT
DAMAGE.

ILLUSTRATION A–3
REAR COVER HINGE PIN

Hinge Pin

Retaining Ring

1–40
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

NOTES

2–1
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

SmartView Option Installation Instructions

If your system includes the SmartView Option install those cables while doing parallel cable
runs in this section. Use the SmartView Option installation manual for specific instructions.
D The Smartview Option has a cable run to the Gantry from the Console

ILLUSTRATION 2–1 INDIGO CONSOLE

Front View J# Device J# Device


J1 Rx Monitor J9 Vieb 
J2 EMC Chassis  J10 DASM 
J3 Kieb  J11 Image Printer 
J4 Modem  J12 VCR 
J5 Video Splitter  J13 Remote Monitor 
J6 Printer  J14 Spare
J7 Display Monitor J15 Spare
J8 Spare J16 Computer Carrier 

ILLUSTRATION 2–2 OCTANE CONSOLE


Front View
J# Device J# Device
J1 Rx Monitor J9 Vieb 
J2 Powered Transceiver  J10 DASM 
J3 Kieb  J11 Image Printer 
J4 VCR  J12 Modem 
J5 Printer  J13 Remote Monitor 
J6 Video Splitter  J14 Spare
J7 Display Monitor J15 Central Data Box 
J8 Octane  J16 EMC Chassis 

2–2
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

CHAPTER 2 – INSTALL POWER, GROUND AND INTERCONNECT CABLES

Usage Note: CT Manufacturing constantly updates this manual to match


product improvements. Use the Installation book that arrives with the
system to install it. Any other revisions of this manual may not exactly
match this system installation. Use other revisions of this Installation
manual for reference purposes only.
This section is written to install console; PN 2138400–2 (Indigo) or PN 2169455 (Octane). Use
section 2–6 for the Indigo console PN 2138400–2 or section 2–7 for the Octane console PN
2169455.

CHAPTER 2 CONTENTS
2–1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2–2 System Power and Ground Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2–3 Electrical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2–4 System Component Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6

ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Ç
2–5 Cable Color Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7

ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Ç Console PN Tin/Silver Box

2–6 ÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
Ç 2138400–2 in Console
Console Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
2–6–1 Console Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
2–6–2 Computer Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2–6–3 Back Bulkhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2–6–4 Display Monitor; Color Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
2–6–5 Rx Display Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12

ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
Console PN Blue Box
2169455 in Console

2–7 Octane Rear Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13


2–7–1 Shipping Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
2–7–2 Modem Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–15
2–7–4 DASM Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
2–7–9 Console Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–22
2–7–10 Computer Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23
2–7–11 Back Bulkhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–24
2–7–12 Display Monitor; Color Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–25
2–7–13 Rx Display Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26

2–3
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

CHAPTER 2 CONTENTS – Continued


2–8 Keyboard and Trackball Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–27
2–9 Gantry Panels and Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–29
2–9–1 EMC Gantry Power Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–30
2–9–2 Non–EMC Gantry Power Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–31
2–10 Table and A7 Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–32
2–11 PDU 2133533 Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–33
2–11–1 A2 Panel – HVDC Supply Output Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34
2–11–2 A1 Panel – Axial Servo Amp Panel Output Connections . . . . . 2–35
2–11–3 A3 Panel – Circuit Breaker Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–36
2–11–4 A3 Panel – Input Power Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–37
2–11–5 A4 Panel – Connector Bulkhead (Bottom View) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–38
2–12 System Ground Connection Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–40
2–13 Contractor Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–41
2–14 Interconnect Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–43

2–4
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

2–1 Introduction

Site use of conduit, floor duct, wall duct, or a raised computer floor, as well as the
individual component layout determines the system cable sequence.
If you can unload the cable boxes off the truck first, try to run cables while others
unload the subsystems from the truck and/or move them to the CT room.
D Try to run the system cables after the Contractor completes the Contractor
supplied wiring.
D All ground wires and other contractor wiring should be complete to the point of
equipment placement.
D If the site uses raceway, you may have to postpone some raceway work, such
as cutting and fitting covers at equipment locations, until after you complete the
cabling and position the equipment.

CAUTION Do not store excess cable in the bottom of the PDU. The 3–phase transformer
can induce stray currents, and the cables restrict air flow, which could cause
the 3–phase transformer and other PDU components to overheat.

When possible, store excess cable length in a serpentine configuration,


approximately 1 meter long. (Do NOT coil excess cable.)

Some components have sufficient room for storage of excess cable lengths. In a
few instances, you may have to provide separate cable storage, if the site doesn’t
have a computer floor.

ILLUSTRATION 2–3 EXCESS CABLE STORAGE CONFIGURATION

Ty–wraps

~ One Meter

Keep signal and control cables away from power cables and power wiring.
D When you lay cables in a raceway, locate the signal cables in a separate section
of the raceway.
Check all connection for tightness.
D Use suitable tools and judgment.
D Check all visible connections, especially ground connections.
Check for reasonable cable routing.
D Take into consideration necessary take–up distances for equipment
maintenance, etc.
D Try to obtain as neat a job as possible.

2–5
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

2–2 System Power and Ground Guidelines

At this point, you MUST physically inspect the System Power and Ground
Connections for the following:
D The system should have a dedicated ground. Make sure the ground wire
originates at the supplying transformer, and has no secondary ground
connected to it, until it reaches the ground bar in our PDU.
D The system ground wire should be copper, and sized equal to, or larger than,
the 3 phase supply wires, with a minimum size of AWG 1/0. The ground wire
should take the same physical path (conduit) as the supply wires.
D The ground wire impedance from the system disconnect, including the ground
rod, should not have an impedance greater than 2 ohms, to earth.
D Never bring the 480 volt system neutral into the PDU.
D Route all 3 phase wires, power cables, neutrals, and grounds in the same
conduit or raceway duct. Do NOT route these cables in the same conduit or
raceway duct as the system control cables.
Check all the ground connections on the system for tightness and proper
termination. Check the ground connection at the supply transformer. Check
the ground from the transformer to its earth connection.

2–3 Electrical Inspection

Arrange for electrical code inspection, if required.

2–4 System Component Identification

TABLE 2–1
SYSTEM COMPONENT IDENTIFIERS

Designator System Component


CT2 Gantry
CT1 Patient Table
PM Power Distribution Unit
OC Operator Console
(Console Computer)
WL X–Ray ON Warning Light

Identify all system cables by the system component designators listed in Table 2–1.
Each end of a system cable has a label, and may have a color near the connector,
(see Table 2–2) to indicate the component, and the jack identifier of the component.

2–6
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

2–5 Cable Color Identifiers

The ends of the cables may be marked with a piece of blue, yellow, red or orange
colored tape, to help with the cable installation. Table 2–2 lists the subcomponent,
and corresponding color.

TABLE 2–2
CABLE COLOR IDENTIFIERS

Subcomponent Color
Gantry Blue
Table Yellow
PDU Red
Console Computer Orange

2–7
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ÇÇÇ
Ç ÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
2–6 Console Wiring
Ç Ç
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇ Console PN
2138400–2

2–6–1 Console Power


ILLUSTRATION 2–4 POWER DETAIL

Front View

J# Device J# Device
J1 Rx Monitor J9 Vieb 
J2 EMC Chassis  J10 DASM 
J3 Kieb  J11 Image Printer 
J4 Modem  J12 VCR 
J5 Video Splitter  J13 Remote Monitor 
J6 Printer  J14 Spare
J7 Display Monitor J15 Spare
J8 Spare J16 Computer Carrier 

J1 J3 J5 J7

J2 J4 J6 J8
J9 J11 J13 J15

J10 J12 J14 J16

12

Console Power 2118139


From: PDU A4J5

Notes:
 Shown for reference, cable already installed.
 Option: Shown for reference, system may or may not have this cable

Indicates Cable Run Number

2–8
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
Ç Ç
ÇÇ
2–6–2 Computer Carrier
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
Ç Ç
ÇÇ Console PN
2138400–2

ILLUSTRATION 2–5 COMPUTER CARRIER DETAIL

Front View Display Video


Rx Video 2142221– Color or
2142221 2143804 – B/W
From: Rx Monitor From: Display Monitor

1 3

J33 Audio Out 

J35 Audio In 

BIT3  SCSI 1 
VCR Video 
Specialix 

Inter Suite 
Line Printer 

Camera SCSI 0  Inter Suite 


J45 Insite Modem 
J44 Security Key  5
J41 Mouse:
110 VAC  Route through
console top using
hole provided.

J42 Keyboard 

Notes:
 Shown for reference, cable already installed.
 Option: Shown for reference; system may or may not have this cable.
 This cable is shipped in the bottom of the Console cabinet.

Indicates Cable Run Number

2–9
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ÇÇÇ
Ç ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Ç
2–6–3 Back Bulkhead
Ç Ç
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Ç Console PN
2138400–2

ILLUSTRATION 2–6 BACK BULKHEAD DETAIL


Rear View

Keyboard 2139579
4 From: Keyboard

Intercom, Scan, E–Stop


8 2139577
From: Gantry A1A5–J1

DAS Data 2117848–2


9 From: Gantry A1A5–J5

LAN 2118150
10 From: Gantry A1A5–J3

Scan Abort 2118148


11 From: Gantry A1A5–J4

Indicates Cable Run Number

2–10
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ÇÇÇ
Ç ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Ç
2–6–4 Display Monitor, Color option
Ç Ç
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Ç Console PN
2138400–2

ILLUSTRATION 2–7 DISPLAY MONITOR DETAIL

Rear View

Display Monitor Rx Monitor

DISPLAY MONITOR
COLOR OPTION

RGB

110VAC
From: P7

3 2142221 Video
From: Computer Carrier Right Hand Video Plug

Indicates Cable Run Number

2–11
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ÇÇÇ
Ç ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Ç
2–6–5 RX Display Monitor
Ç Ç
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Ç Console PN
2138400–2

The Rx color monitor may also have a touch option.


ILLUSTRATION 2–8 RX MONITOR DETAIL
Rear View

Display Monitor Rx Monitor

RX MONITOR

RGB

110VAC
From: P1

1
2142221 Video
From: Computer Carrier
Left Hand Video Plug

Indicates Cable Run Number

2–12
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
2–7 Octane Rear Access
ÉÉ
É ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ Console PN
2169455

To install cables at the rear of the Octane in the following sub–sections it will be necessary
to gain access to the rear of the Octane computer.
1. Remove the screws at locations A and B.
2. Slide the drawer forward.
3. Remove the velcro strap and metal bracket, see Illustration 2–10, page 2–14.

Note: To prevent overheating of the Octane computer you must remove the velcro strap
before turning on power.

Note: Once cable installation is complete return to step 4.

4. Reverse the procedure to secure the Octane back into the console. Be aware of tight
clearance points while sliding the tray back in.
D Location C, between the Octane and SCSI connector.
ILLUSTRATION 2–9 OCTANE SLIDE DRAWER

Front View – Console


C

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ OCTANE

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ É
A B

2–13
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
É
2–7–1 Shiping Bracket
ÉÉ
É ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
É Console PN
2169455

ILLUSTRATION 2–10 STRAP DETAIL

WARNING: Strap must be removed before power is turned on.


The strap is blocking cooling air vents.

Remove strap before turning on power.


The strap is blocking cooling air vents.
Store strap for future use.

Remove and store bracket.

Many items removed for clarity

2–14
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
2–7–2 Modem Installation (Hardware Option)
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ Console PN
2169455

How to Install

(1) Some Consoles will come with the modem already installed.
(1) Refer to Illustration 2–11 and Illustration 2–12.
(2) Feed cable 2206183, modem power and phone line through the shelf provided for the modem
from the back of the console to the front.
(3) Connect cable 2206183, power and phone line to the modem.
(4) Place the modem in the console on the shelf provided, see Illustration 2–11.
(5) Plug the modem power cord/pack into P12, see Illustration 2–18.

ILLUSTRATION 2–11 MODEM DETAIL 1

Place Modem Here

US ONLY

Modem Cables Shown;


Serial
Line In
Power

MODEM

2–15
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
É ÉÉÉÉ
2–7–3 Modem Installation (Hardware Option)
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
É ÉÉÉÉ Console PN
2169455

(6) Connect the other end of cable 2206183 to serial port 1 of the Octane.

ILLUSTRATION 2–12 MODEM DETAIL 1

OCTANE

MODEM

2206183

Connect to Serial Port 1

Many items removed for clarity

2–16
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
2–7–4 DASM Installation (Hardware Option)
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ Console PN
2169455

How to Install

(1) Refer to Illustration 2–13.


(2) Remove screws (items C) and cover (item A) and set aside.
(3) Verify/Remove third jumper pin from ribbon cable (view B).

Note: Following this step will ensure the DASM is set to SCSI id 1.

(4) Replace cover and secure with screws.


ILLUSTRATION 2–13 DASM DETAIL 1

BOTTOM
VIEW
DASM

2–17
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
É ÉÉÉÉ
2–7–5 DASM Installation (Hardware Option)
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
É ÉÉÉÉ Console PN
2169455

(5) Refer to Illustration 2–14, Analog DASM only.


(6) Attach cable 46–296980G1 to front of DASM.
ILLUSTRATION 2–14 DASM DETAIL 2

Analog DASM

PN 46–296980G1

Many items removed for clarity

2–18
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
2–7–6 DASM Installation (Hardware Option)
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ Console PN
2169455

ILLUSTRATION 2–15 DASM DETAIL 3

Digital DASM

Imager

SCSI

SCSI

Many items removed for clarity

2–19
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
É ÉÉÉÉ
2–7–7 DASM Installation (Hardware Option)
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
É ÉÉÉÉ Console PN
2169455

(7) Refer to Illustration 2–16, disconnect the Central Data Box end of SCSI cable A.
ILLUSTRATION 2–16 DASM DETAIL 4

Rear View of Octane and Central Data Box

SCSI Cable Configuration without DASM

OCTANE
CENTRAL
DATA
BOX

PN 2191432

Many items removed for clarity

2–20
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
2–7–8 DASM Installation (Hardware Option)
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ Console PN
2169455

(8) Refer to Illustration 2–17.


(9) Remove external SCSI terminator from rear of DASM and discard.
(10)Install SCSI 3 to 1 Adapter to the back of the DASM.
(11)Attach the free end of cable A to adapter installed in step (10).
(12)Attach cable B between the Central Data Box and DASM as shown.
(13)Plug DASM power cord into J10, see Illustration 2–18.
(14)Re–attach remaining cable(s) from camera to DASM.
ILLUSTRATION 2–17 DASM DETAIL 5

Place the DASM


inside the console Use SCSI 3 to
next to the Octane. 1 Adapter for
No mounting is cable coming CENTRAL
provided. from Octane
Camera DATA
Cable BOX
PN 2209910

OCTANE

DASM
Digital or
Analog

PN 2110495–2
A
PN 2191432

Many items removed for clarity

2–21
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
É
2–7–9 Console Power
ÉÉ
É ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
É Console PN
2169455

ILLUSTRATION 2–18 POWER DETAIL

Front View
J# Device J# Device
J1 Rx Monitor J9 Vieb 
J2 Powered Transceiver  J10 DASM 
J3 Kieb  J11 Image Printer 
J4 VCR  J12 Modem 
J5 Printer  J13 Remote Monitor 
J6 Video Splitter  J14 Spare
J7 Display Monitor J15 Central Data Box 
J8 Octane  J16 EMC Chassis 

1 2

J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15

J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16

12
Console Power 2118139
From: PDU A4J5 Plug is a
twist–lock style.
Be sure to engage
Notes: plug fully and twist
 Shown for reference, cable already installed. to lock into place.
 Option: Shown for reference, system may or may not have this cable

Indicates Cable Run Number

2–22
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

É ÉÉ
ÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
2–7–10 Computer Carrier
ÉÉÉÉ
É ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ Console PN
2169455

ILLUSTRATION 2–19 COMPUTER CARRIER DETAIL


Front View Note: Cable runs 1 and 3 may already be
connected at the Octane end. The
monitor end of these cables can be
found at the rear cable exit of the
console. The monitor power cords
will also be plugged into the power
panel and be attached to the video
cables.

Rear View of Octane

Headphone
Headphone
Cable to
Bulkhead 
R L
Microphone IN
Cables to
Bulkhead  OUT
3 Display Video
2142221 – Color
From: Display

À
Coaxial
SCSI Cable to Monitor

À
IN
Central Data Optical
3D
Box or DASM  OUT

Cable to Network PCI BIT 3 


Transceiver 

Mouse: Route
through hole in
Console top. 1 Rx Video
2142221

À
From: Rx Monitor
Keyboard 

À
Keyboard Mouse

2 1 3D
Flat side of Mouse and
Keyboard connector, orien-
tate to inside of Computer, 110 VAC 
as shown.
Cable to modem
Security Key
Notes: Cable 
 Shown for reference, cable already installed.
 Option: Shown for reference; system may or may not have this cable.
 This cable is shipped in the bottom of the Console cabinet.

Indicates Cable Run Number

2–23
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
É
2–7–11 Back Bulkhead
ÉÉ
É ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
É Console PN
2169455

ILLUSTRATION 2–20 BACK BULKHEAD DETAIL

Rear View Front View

Routed from front


of FEP board.

LAN 2118150
From: Gantry A1A5–J3

DAS Data: 2117848–2 Scan Abort 2118148


From: Gantry A1A5–J5
9 10 11 From: Gantry A1A5–J4

J17 J18

J19 J20

Indicates Cable Run Number

Keyboard 2139579 Intercom, Scan, E–Stop


4 8 2139577
From: Keyboard
From: Gantry A1A5–J1

2–24
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
É
2–7–12 Display Monitor, Color option.
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
É Console PN
2169455

ILLUSTRATION 2–21 DISPLAY MONITOR DETAIL

Rear View

Display Monitor Rx Monitor

DISPLAY MONITOR
COLOR OPTION

RGB

110VAC
From: P7

3 2142221 Video
From: Computer Carrier Top Video Plug
Indicates Cable Run Number

2–25
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
É
2–7–13 RX Display Monitor
ÉÉ
É ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
É Console PN
2169455

ILLUSTRATION 2–22 RX MONITOR DETAIL

Rear View

Display Monitor Rx Monitor

RX MONITOR

RGB

110VAC
From: P1

1
2142221 Video
From: Computer Carrier
Bottom Video Plug

Indicates Cable Run Number

2–26
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

2–8 Keyboard and Trackball Cables

Connect the Trackball and Keyboard cables, as shown in Illustration 2–23 and
illustration 2–24.
D Notice that the angled end of the keyboard cable connects to the keyboard, not
the straight end.
Do not connect the mouse to the keyboard.
D Route the mouse cable through the console top, and connect it directly to the
computer carrier.
D The mouse is cable run 5.

2–27
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 2–23 KEYBOARD/TRACKBALL DETAIL

Trackball

4
Keyboard Cable

Indicates Cable Run Number

ILLUSTRATION 2–24 CABLE ROUTING

Attach the Trackball / Mouse cable raceway strip now.

2–28
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

2–9 Gantry Panels and Cable Connections


ILLUSTRATION 2–25 GANTRY

A1 A5 panel
Detail A

A1 TS 1
Detail B

Gantry

ILLUSTRATION 2–26 A1A5 PANEL, DETAIL A

J1 J3

8 J7
Not used on 5.3
2139577 or later 10
Software
2118150
J2

15 (J6 does not exist J4


on an EMC gantry) J5
2118146 EMC gantry has 4–position TS–1.
(Terminal Strip 1.)
11

J6
2118148
9 **
Used for VX only 2117848–2
(not used on RP or IG) A1A5 Panel

Indicates Cable Run Number


Detail A

Note: ** Take extreme care when you install the fiber optic DAS data cable. (Part
#2117848–2). The DAS cable is fragile; do not step on it, kink it, or bend it sharply.

2–29
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

2–9–1 EMC Gantry Power Cable Connections

Note: An EMC system has a gantry with a 4–position TS1. (TS1 means terminal strip 1.) A
non–EMC system gantry contains a 12–position TS1.

ILLUSTRATION 2–27 EMC GANTRY – DETAIL B

Blue (Neutral)

Green/Yellow
(Ground)

Brown
(Hot)

AC LINE FILTER

2118142
120V AC from PDU

16

1 2 3 4

Indicates Cable Run Number

2118143 2118145
13 Servo Amp Power 14
HV DC (550) from PDU
from PDU

A1 TS 1

Install the TS1 terminal strip cover assembly with four 8–32 x .25 lg screws.

2–30
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

2–9–2 Non–EMC Gantry Power Cable Connections

Note: A non–EMC system gantry has a 12–position TS1. (TS1 means terminal strip 1.) An
EMC system gantry contains a 4–position TS1.

Install the TS1 terminal strip cover assembly with four 8–32 x .25 lg screws.
ILLUSTRATION 2–28 NON–EMC – DETAIL B

TS1–5,6 have straps.


Place the cable terminal
under the strap then tighten.

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

46–297080G1
46–327155G1
HV DC (550) 16
Servo Amp Power from PDU
14 from PDU
2119603
13 110V AC from PDU

A1 TS 1

Indicates Cable Run Number

2–31
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

2–10 Table and A7 Panel Connections


ILLUSTRATION 2–29 HISPEED ADVANTAGE TABLE3

ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
etc board

Weldment Plate
A2A7 PANEL
(DETAIL A: See Illustration 2–30)

ILLUSTRATION 2–30 A2A7 PANEL – DETAIL A

J1 J2 J3

FROM GANTRY FROM GANTRY FROM TILT MOTOR

J7 2118141
J6 J5 J8 Table Power
FROM FROM GANTRY FROM from PDU
FOOTSWITCH FOOTSWITCH 17

A2A7 Panel
Indicates Cable Run Number

2–32
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

2–11 PDU 2133533 Cable Connections


ILLUSTRATION 2–31 PDU AREA LOCATIONS

SERVO AMPLIFIER
ASSEMBLY
A1 PANEL

PDU CONTROL
BOARD
A6 PANEL

TRANSFORMER
ASSEMBLY (in back)
A5 PANEL

AC POWER
DISTRIBUTION
A3 PANEL

HVDC SUPPLY
A2 PANEL

INPUT
POWER
A3 PANEL

OUTPUT
CONNECTORS
BULKHEAD
A4 PANEL

2–33
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

2–11–1 PDU 2133533 A2 Panel – HVDC Supply Output Connections


ILLUSTRATION 2–32 HVDC SUPPLY OUTPUT CONNECTIONS

TS1–1 (Red)

Ground

TS2–1 (Black)

PDU 2133533 A2 Panel – HVDC SUPPLY OUTPUT CONNECTIONS

PDU 2133533

46–297080G1
(for Non EMC Gantry)
13
2118143 (for EMC Gantry)

Install Shield Clamp tightly around exposed


Cable Shield at lower left of PDU. (EMC
Gantry only)

Indicates Cable Run Number


NOTE: EMC gantry has 4–position TS1
Non–EMC gantry has 12–position TS1
(TS1 stands for Terminal Strip 1).

2–34
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

2–11–2 PDU 2133533 A1 Panel – Axial Servo Amp Panel Output Connections
ILLUSTRATION 2–33 AXIAL SERVO AMP PANEL OUTPUT CONNECTIONS

TS1–1 (White)

TS1–2 (Red)

TS1–3 (Shield)

PDU 2133533 A1 Panel – Axial Servo Amp Panel

PDU 2133533

46–327155G1
(for Non EMC Gantry)

2118145 (for EMC Gantry)


14

Install Shield Clamp Tightly


Around Exposed Cable Shield at Lower Left of
PDU. (EMC Gantry only)

NOTE: EMC gantry has 4–position TS1


Indicates Cable Run Number Non–EMC gantry has 12–position TS1
(TS1 stands for Terminal Strip 1).

2–35
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

2–11–3 PDU 2133533 A3 Panel – Circuit Breaker Panel


ILLUSTRATION 2–34 A3 PANEL

CB1 Table 24 hr
Console
Relay control PWB

CB2 Tilt/elevation drive


Cradle

CB3 GPDU service outlet


Table service outlet

CB4 SCU

CB5 Gantry
DCRGS 120vac

PDU 2133533

A3 Panel

2–36
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

2–11–4 PDU 2133533 A3 Panel – Input Power Panel Connections


ILLUSTRATION 2–35 INPUT POWER PANEL CONNECTIONS

INPUT POWER PANEL

“Parking position” for “Neutral” wire, if present

Ground
(To wall ground)
PDU 2133533
L1 L2 L3

TB1

L1 = Phase A from wall


L2 = Phase B from wall
L3 = Phase C from wall

A3 Panel

2–37
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

2–11–5 PDU 2133533 A4 Panel – Connector Bulkhead (Bottom View)


ILLUSTRATION 2–36 A4 PANEL (BOTTOM VIEW)

A4 PANEL – CONNECTOR BULKHEAD

J3

NOT USED 17
J4
2118141
X
J2 16 HVDC
2119603 Non EMC Keyswitch
15 J5 J6
2118142 EMC
2118146 N.C.
12
2118139

Indicates Cable Run Number

PDU 2133533

1 2 1 2
Ground from
X–Ray Door Footswitch
Warning Light Interlock Ground Bar

See next page for details to install X–Ray


Warning Light and Door Interlock.

A4 Panel Door Interlock & X–ray Warning Light

2–38
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 2–37 X–RAY WARNING LIGHT AND DOOR INTERLOCK CIRCUIT

External Power
source for Room External Low Voltage
PDU A4 PANEL X–Ray (<30v) Power
Warning Light
Warning Source for X–ray
Light Warning Light
Relay Coil
Ground
Neutral
X–Ray Warning
Light Connections
Hot
Door
Interlock
1 2 External
Relay
1 2 3 4 Neutral
OUT Hot
Neutral
IN
Hot

X–Ray Warning Light Circuit

X–Ray Warning Door


PDU A4 PANEL
Light Interlock
1 2 3 4 1 2

Normally Open
Switch

Door Interlock Circuit

Note: Connect a door interlock to the system, to prevent X–Ray: remove the
jumper from the door interlock connections on the PDU A4 panel, and
connect a normally open switch across them. The Interlock circuit
prevents X–Ray when you open the scan room door.

2–39
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

2–12 System Ground Connections


ILLUSTRATION 2–38 SYSTEM GROUND CONNECTIONS

CUT GREEN GROUND WIRES TO LENGTH


 

  
 


    
# 2*  CT1 RACEWAY
GROUND BUS
#1/0*
1 20

  
  
SEE TABLE BELOW
  



FOR CONNECTIONS



  Attach the1 inch braid to the
table with two metal plates, DETAIL
# 2*
# 2* E 46–297427P1 .
T Position the braid under each
C plate, and screw down the plate
with the two bolts.

# 1/0

 * use ground wire supplied with system for these grounds
VAULT  
GROUND

TABLE 2–3
SYSTEM GROUND CONNECTIONS

AWG CONNECTION P.M.


# INSTALLED
Connection To Connection To
#1/0** EARTH GROUND PDU
#2 OC CT1 RACEWAY #10
#2 CT2 CT1 RACEWAY #9
#2 CT1 CT1 RACEWAY #8
#1/0 PM CT1 RACEWAY #11
GND Braid (2) CT1 CT2

** #1/0 is for field. Factory can use #4 for EARTH GROUND to PDU connection.

2–40
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICAL INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

2–13 Contractor Connections

FIELD: Ring out all wires before connecting.

CONNECTION AWG
OR # CONNECTION FROM CONNECTION TO Installed
WALL BOX

A1 #1 A PM A3 TB1 L1
#1 B A3 TB1 L2
#1 C A3 TB1 L3

#1/0 GND A3 TB1 GND


(Do NOT connect anything to
‘Neutral’ point.)
WL
(Warning light) #12 WL–0A (Blk) (From external low PM A4 WL Connection 1
voltage (<30v) power source)
#12 Neutral (Wht) (From external power PM A4 WL Connection 2
#12 source)
PM–A4 WL Connection 3 0A (Blk) (To External Warning
Light Relay)
PM–A4 WL Connection 4 Neutral (Wht) (To External
Warning Light Relay)
Ground (From external power source) Ground (To warning light ground)
Door – Room Door Interlock Connections PM A4 TS2 – 1,2
Interlock

2–41
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

NOTES

2–42
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

2–14 SYSTEM INTERCONNECTS

HOW TO USE:

3 sheets; A, B, and C are required for a complete system interconnect.


Sheet A – Console Connections.
Sheet B – Console, Gantry and PDU Connections.
Sheet C – Table Connections.

Use 2–4 to select the system interconnect pages that apply to your system. Remember that you need 3 pages
for a complete system interconnect; A, B, and C.

TABLE 2–4
SYSTEM INTERCONNECT DRAWING MATRIX

SYSTEM TYPE ILLUSTRATION NUMBER


CONSOLE (A) CONSOLE / GANTRY / PDU (B) TABLE (C)
INDIGO – NON EMC 2–39 2–40 2–45
INDIGO – EMC 2–39 2–41 2–45
OCTANE – NON EMC 2–42 2–43 2–45
OCTANE 2–42 2–44 2–45

2–43
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 2–39
HISPEED CT/I INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM CONSOLE CONNECTIONS

USE FOR SYSTEM TYPE


EMC NON–EMC How to use this page: Check box when cable end is installed. n
-
INDIGO X X
Indicates Cable Run Number
OCTANE

(ORANGE)
Console

Display Monitor
Computer Carrier J41 MOUSE
5 -

3
Computer Carrier
Right Video Head
- 2142221 Video -

Rx Monitor

Back Computer Carrier


1
Bulkhead Left Video Head
J19 - 2142221 Video -

Keyboard
- 4

2139579 Keyboard -

TrackBall
6 -

2–44
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 2–40
NON–EMC HISPEED CT/I INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM CONSOLE / GANTRY / PDU

USE FOR SYSTEM TYPE


EMC NON–EMC
GANTRY PDU
INDIGO X CT2 PM
OCTANE (BLUE) (RED)

(ORANGE) PDU
Console 12
A4 J5
Power Panel - 2118139 Console Power -
Gantry
11 13
A1A5 A1TS1 A2 TS1–1
Back Bulkhead J18 J4 5, 6, 8 TS2–1
- 2118148 Scan Abort - - HVDC Power - GND
10 A1A5 46–297080G1 (550)
Back Bulkhead J17 J3
- 2118150 LAN -
9
Connect to the FEP A1A5 14 A1 TS1–1
A1TS1
2117848–2 DAS Data - J5 9, 10, 11 TS1–2
8 TS1–3
A1A5 - Axial Motor -
Back Bulkhead J20
J1 Power 46–327155G1
- 2139577 Intercom, Scan, E–Stop -

A1A5
15
J2 A4 J2
- Signal -
2118146

16
A1TS1
A4 J4
1, 2, 3
How to use this page: Check box when cable end is installed. n
- - 120VDC Power -
2119603
Indicates Cable Run Number

2–45
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 2–41
EMC HISPEED CT/I INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM CONSOLE / GANTRY / PDU

USE FOR SYSTEM TYPE


EMC NON–EMC
GANTRY PDU
INDIGO X
CT2 PM
OCTANE (BLUE) (RED)

(ORANGE) PDU
Console 12
Power Panel A4 J5
- 2118139 Console Power -
Gantry
11 13 A2 TS1–1
A1A5 A1TS1
Back Bulkhead J18 1, 2 TS2–1
- J4
2118148 Scan Abort - - HVDC Power -
10 A1A5 2118143 (550)
Back Bulkhead J17 J3
- 2118150 LAN -
* *
9 14
A1A5 A1 TS1–1
Connect to the FEP A1TS1
2117848–2 DAS Data - J5 3, 4
TS1–2
8
A1A5 - Axial Motor -
Back Bulkhead J20 Power 2118145
J1
- 2139577 Intercom, Scan, E–Stop -
* *
* Shields grounded with
clamp at PDU cabinet and
gantry base

15
A1A5
J2 A4 J2
- Signal -
How to use this page: Check box when cable end is installed. n
-
2118146

Line Filter 16
Indicates Cable Run Number Top: Blue
Middle: A4 J4
Green/Yellow
Bottom: Brown - 120VDC Power -
2118142

2–46
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 2–42
HISPEED CT/I INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM CONSOLE CONNECTIONS

USE FOR SYSTEM TYPE


EMC NON–EMC
How to use this page: Check box when cable end is installed. n
-
INDIGO
OCTANE X X Indicates Cable Run Number

Console

Octane
5
Mouse MOUSE
Display Monitor
-

3
Computer Carrier
Top Video Head
2142221 Video -
-

Rx Monitor
1
Computer Carrier
Bottom Video Head
2142221 Video -
-

4 Keyboard
Note: Cable runs 1 and 3 may already be
-
connected at the Octane end. The
Back 2139579 Keyboard - monitor end of these cables can be
Bulkhead found at the rear cable exit of the
J19 6 console. The monitor power cords
TrackBall will also be plugged into the power
panel and be attached to the video
-
cables.

2–47
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

NOTES

2–48
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 2–43
NON–EMC HISPEED CT/I INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM CONSOLE / GANTRY / PDU

USE FOR SYSTEM TYPE


EMC NON–EMC
INDIGO
PDU
GANTRY PM
OCTANE X CT2 (RED)
(BLUE)

(ORANGE) PDU
Console 12
A4 J5
Power Panel - 2118139 Console Power -
Gantry
11 13
A1A5 A1TS1 A2 TS1–1
Back Bulkhead J18 J4 5, 6, 8
- 2118148 Scan Abort - TS2–1
- HVDC Power - GND
10 A1A5 46–297080G1 (550)
Back Bulkhead J17 J3
- 2118150 LAN -
9
Connect to the FEP A1A5 14 A1 TS1–1
A1TS1
- 2117848–2 DAS Data - J5 9, 10, 11 TS1–2
8 TS1–3
Back Bulkhead J20 A1A5 - Axial Motor -
J1 Power 46–327155G1
- 2139577 Intercom, Scan, E–Stop -
A1A5
J7
Not 15
used A1A5
J2 A4 J2
on 5.3 - Signal -
or 2118146
later
Softw
n are
How to use this page: Check box when cable end is installed. -
16
A1TS1
Indicates Cable Run Number A4 J4
1, 2, 3
- 120VDC Power -
2119603

2–49
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 2–44
EMC HISPEED CT/I INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM CONSOLE / GANTRY / PDU

USE FOR SYSTEM TYPE


EMC NON–EMC
INDIGO
GANTRY PDU
CT2 PM
OCTANE X (BLUE) (RED)

(ORANGE) PDU
Console 12
Power Panel A4 J5
- 2118139 Console Power -
Gantry
11 13 A2 TS1–1
Back Bulkhead J18 A1A5 A1TS1
1, 2 TS2–1
- J4
2118148 Scan Abort - - HVDC Power -
10 A1A5 2118143 (550)
Back Bulkhead J17
J3
- 2118150 LAN -
* *
9 14
A1A5 A1 TS1–1
Connect to the FEP A1TS1
- 2117848–2 DAS Data - J5 3, 4
TS1–2
8
A1A5 - Axial Motor -
Back Bulkhead J20
J1 Power 2118145
- 2139577 Intercom, Scan, E–Stop -
7 * *
A1A5 * Shields grounded with
J7 clamp at PDU cabinet and
Not gantry base
used
on 5.3
or 15
A1A5
later A4 J2
J2
Softw - Signal -
are 2118146

How to use this page: Check box when cable end is installed. n
-
Line Filter
Top: Blue
16
Middle: A4 J4
Green/Yellow
Indicates Cable Run Number Bottom: Brown - 120VDC Power -
2118142

2–50
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 2–45
HISPEED CT/I INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM TABLE CONNECTIONS

USE FOR SYSTEM TYPE


EMC NON–EMC How to use this page: Check box when cable end is installed. n
-
INDIGO X X
Indicates Cable Run Number
OCTANE X X
TABLE GANTRY PDU
CT1 CT2 PM
(YELLOW) (BLUE) (RED)

Table Gantry PDU

A2A7–J1 FIXED
- LAN

A2A7–J2 FIXED
- Tilt Limit Switch

A2A7–J3 FIXED
- Tilt Motor Power

A2A7–J5 FIXED
- Signal

17
A2A7–J7 A4 J3
- 2118141 Table Power -
Raceway
Footswitches
A2A7–J8 FIXED
- Footswitch
A2A7–J6 FIXED
- Footswitch

2–51
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

NOTES

2–52
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICA INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

CHAPTER 3 – SYSTEM CONTINUITY and GROUND CHECKS

CHAPTER 3 CONTENTS
Note: A non–EMC system gantry contains a 12–position TS1. (TS1 means
terminal strip 1.) An EMC system gantry contains a 4–position TS1.

Use Section 3–1 with non–EMC systems. Section 3–1 begins on page 3–2.
3–1–1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3–1–3 Site Ground Impedance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3–1–5 Site Ground Current Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3–1–8 System Continuity and Ground Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3–1–9 Site Ground Continuity Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5

Use Section 3–2 with EMC systems. Section 3–2 begins on page 3–6.
3–2–1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3–2–3 Site Ground Impedance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3–2–5 Site Ground Current Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3–2–8 System Continuity and Ground Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3–2–9 Site Ground Continuity Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9

3–1
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

3–1 Non–EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533

Note: A non–EMC system gantry contains a 12–position TS1. (TS1 means


terminal strip 1.) An EMC system gantry contains a 4–position TS1.

3–1–1 Introduction

Use Section 3–1 with non–EMC systems that have PDU part number 2133533.
Use the continuity and ground checks to verify the system power connections have not
shorted to ground, and that the ground and neutral connections are intact.

3–1–2 Required Tools:


D DVM
D ECOS1023H Power Line–leakage Current Tester (60HZ) 46–194427P248
D Adapter Cables for Power Line–leakage Current Tester 46–194427P249

3–1–3 Site Ground Impedance Check


(Non–EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533)

CAUTION Turn OFF, tag and lock wall power.

Use an ECOS1023–100, or equivalent device, to measure the DC resistance between


the following list of components in the system. Verify the given specifications:

3–1–4 Ground Specifications

Maximum DC resistance of 0.01 Ohm between:


D PDU A3 Ground Bus and Computer System ground point
D Independent Console and Computer System ground point
D All other Display or Computing Options and Computer System ground point

Maximum DC resistance of 0.025 Ohm between:


D Vault Ground and PDU A3 Ground Bus
D PDU A4 Ground Bus and Table/Gantry Raceway ground point
D Table and Table/Gantry Raceway ground point
D Gantry and Table/Gantry Raceway ground point
D Any room facility patient ground points and PDU A4 Ground Bus

j Check box when complete.

3–2
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICA INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

3–1–5 Site Ground Current Check


(Non–EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533)

Measure the current on the System Ground in A1 with ALL equipment powered OFF,
and the A1 disconnect handle pulled down.

3–1–6 Required Tools:


D Beckman 3030 meter or equivalent
D Beckman CT231 clamp–on Amp probe 46–194427P228 (Fits up to #2 size wire)
D Beckman CT232 clamp–on Amp probe 46–194427P270
(Fits #1 size wire and larger)

3–1–7 Check Ground Current


1. Set meter range for AC Current 2M switch position
2. Use the appropriate clamp–on probe to measure the following:

Note: The Amp probes are 1000:1. The 2M range may give a 0.123 reading,
which is 123 milliamps

D A1 Panel System Ground ____.


(In theory, this measurement equals “0” however, you may measure some
current, <50 mA.)
If you measure more than 50mA, use the System Ground Connection Illustration in
Chapter 2 of this Direction, to double–check the chassis ground runs.
j Check box when complete.

3–3
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

3–1–8 System Continuity and Ground Checks


(Non–EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533)

CAUTION Turn OFF, tag and lock wall power.

1. Verify <1 ohm of resistance exists between the following ground connections:

FROM TO
Wall ground connection PDU cabinet
PDU A1 chassis PDU cabinet

j Check box when complete.


2. Remove the PDU A3 circuit breaker panel cover.

CAUTION Turn OFF, tag and lock all power in the bay.

3. Use an ohmmeter to verify the presence of less than 1.0 ohm of resistance
between each of the following points:

FROM TO
PDU A2 TS1 (+HVDC) Gantry A1 TS1–6 - Check box when complete
(+HVDC connection)
PDU A2 TS2 (HVDC RTN) Gantry A1 TS1–5 - Check box when complete
(HVDC RTN connection)
PDU A1 TS1–1 (–axial servo output) Gantry A1 TS1–9 - Check box when complete
PDU A1 TS1–2 (+axial servo output) Gantry A1 TS1–10 - Check box when complete
PDU A3 K2–4T2 Gantry A1 TS1–3 (Hot) - Check box when complete
(bottom relay on A3 panel)
PDU A4 Ground Bus Gantry A1 TS1–2 (Neutral) - Check box when complete

4. Use an ohmmeter to verify the presence of less than 1.0 ohm of resistance
between each of the following points:

FROM TO
PDU A3 Ground Bus Gantry A1 TS1–1 - Check box when complete
Gantry AC Ground
PDU A3 Ground Bus Gantry A1 TS1–8 - Check box when complete
HVDC cable shield
PDU A3 Ground Bus Gantry A1 TS1–11 - Check box when complete
Axial cable shield

3–4
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICA INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

CAUTION Turn OFF all PDU circuit breakers.

5. Set an ohmmeter to the lowest scale. Check between the following points for
shorts to ground. Verify no continuity exists between the following points:

FROM TO
PDU A2 TS1 (+HVDC) Bay vault ground - Check box when complete
PDU A2 TS2 (–HVDC) Bay vault ground - Check box when complete
PDU A1 TS1–1 (–axial servo output) Bay vault ground - Check box when complete
PDU A1 TS1–2 (+axial servo output) Bay vault ground - Check box when complete

6. Replace the cover over terminal strip TS1, on the left side of the gantry.
D Leave the metal cover off the PDU A3 input power panel until you complete the
checks in the next section.

j Check box when complete.

3–1–9 Site Ground Continuity Check


(Non–EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533)

CAUTION Turn OFF, tag and lock wall power.

1. Unplug all units.


2. Review the System Ground Connection Illustration in Chapter 2, and make sure
you securely fastened all connections, at both ends.

Note: The next step verifies the presence of chassis ground connections between
system components. This procedure does not provide a comprehensive
check of the quality of those connections.

3. Use an ohmmeter to verify the presence of less than 1.0 ohm of resistance
between each of the following points:

FROM TO
PDU A3 Ground Bus Vault ground - Check box when complete
PDU A3 Ground Bus Table/Gantry raceway ground point - Check box when complete
Table/Gantry raceway ground point Gantry - Check box when complete
Table/Gantry raceway ground point Table - Check box when complete
Table/Gantry raceway ground point Operator Console - Check box when complete
All Display or Computing Options Operator Console - Check box when complete
Any room facility patient ground points PDU A4 Ground Bus - Check box when complete

j Check box when complete.

3–5
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

3–2 EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533

Note: A non–EMC system gantry contains a 12–position TS1. (TS1 means


terminal strip 1.) An EMC system gantry contains a 4–position TS1.

3–2–1 Introduction

Use Section 3–2 with EMC systems that have PDU part number 2133533.
Use the continuity and ground checks to verify the system power connections have not
shorted to ground, and that the ground and neutral connections are intact.

3–2–2 Required Tools:


D DVM
D ECOS1023H Power Line–leakage Current Tester (60HZ) 46–194427P248
D Adapter Cables for Power Line–leakage Current Tester 46–194427P249

3–2–3 Site Ground Impedance Check


(EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533)

CAUTION Turn OFF, tag and lock wall power.

Use an ECOS1023–100, or equivalent device, to measure the DC resistance between


the following list of components in the system. Verify the given specifications:

3–2–4 Ground Specifications

Maximum DC resistance of 0.01 Ohm between:


D PDU A3 Ground Bus and Computer System ground point
D Independent Console and Computer System ground point
D All other Display or Computing Options and Computer System ground point

Maximum DC resistance of 0.025 Ohm between:


D Vault Ground and PDU A3 Ground Bus
D PDU A3 Ground Bus and Table/Gantry Raceway ground point
D Table and Table/Gantry Raceway ground point
D Gantry and Table/Gantry Raceway ground point
D Any room facility patient ground points and PDU A4 Ground Bus

j Check box when complete.

3–6
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICA INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

3–2–5 Site Ground Current Check


(EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533)

Measure the current on the System Ground in A1 with ALL equipment powered OFF,
and the A1 disconnect handle pulled down.

3–2–6 Required Tools:


D Beckman 3030 meter or equivalent
D Beckman CT231 clamp–on Amp probe 46–194427P228 (Fits up to #2 size wire)
D Beckman CT232 clamp–on Amp probe 46–194427P270
(Fits #1 size wire and larger)

3–2–7 Check Ground Current


1. Set meter range for AC Current 2M switch position
2. Use the appropriate clamp–on probe to measure the following:

Note: The Amp probes are 1000:1. The 2M range may give a 0.123 reading,
which is 123 milliamps

D A1 Panel System Ground ____.


(In theory, this measurement equals “0” however, you may measure some
current, <50 mA.)

If you measure more than 50mA, use the System Ground Connection Illustration in
Chapter 2 of this Direction to double–check the chassis ground runs.
j Check box when complete.

3–7
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

3–2–8 System Continuity and Ground Checks


(EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533)

CAUTION Turn OFF, tag and lock wall power.

1. Verify <1 ohm of resistance exists between the following ground connections:

FROM TO
Wall ground connection PDU cabinet
PDU A1 chassis PDU cabinet

j Check box when complete.


2. Remove the PDU A3 circuit breaker panel cover.

CAUTION Turn OFF, tag and lock all power in the bay.

3. Use an ohmmeter to verify the presence of less than 1.0 ohm of resistance
between each of the following points:

FROM TO
PDU A2 TS1 (+HVDC) Gantry A1 TS1–1 - Check box when complete
(+HVDC connection)
PDU A2 TS2 (HVDC RTN) Gantry A1 TS1–2 - Check box when complete
(HVDC RTN connection)
PDU A1 TS1–1 (–axial servo output) Gantry A1 TS1–4 - Check box when complete
PDU A1 TS1–2 (+axial servo output) Gantry A1 TS1–3 - Check box when complete
PDU A3 K2–4T2 Gantry A1 AC Filter - Check box when complete
(bottom relay on A3 panel) Bottom connection (Brown)
PDU A3 Ground Bus Gantry A1 AC Filter - Check box when complete
Middle connection (Yellow/Green)

4. Use an ohmmeter to verify the presence of less than 1.0 ohm of resistance
between each of the following points:

FROM TO
PDU A3 Ground Bus Gantry A1 AC Filter - Check box when complete
Top connection (Blue)
PDU A3 Ground Bus Gantry A1 TS1 - Check box when complete
HVDC cable shield
PDU A3 Ground Bus Gantry A1 TS1 - Check box when complete
Axial cable shield

3–8
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICA INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

CAUTION Turn OFF all PDU circuit breakers.

5. Set an ohmmeter to the lowest scale. Check between the following points for
shorts to ground. Verify no continuity exists between the following points:

FROM TO
PDU A2 TS1 (+HVDC) Bay vault ground - Check box when complete
PDU A2 TS2 (–HVDC) Bay vault ground - Check box when complete
PDU A1 TS1–1 (–axial servo output) Bay vault ground - Check box when complete
PDU A1 TS1–2 (+axial servo output) Bay vault ground - Check box when complete

6. Replace the cover over terminal strip TS1, on the left side of the gantry.
D Leave the metal cover off the PDU A3 input power panel until you complete the
checks in the next section.

j Check box when complete.

3–2–9 Site Ground Continuity Check


(EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533)

CAUTION Turn OFF, tag and lock wall power.

1. Unplug all units.


2. Review the System Ground Connection Illustration in Chapter 2, and make sure
you securely fastened all connections, at both ends.

Note: The next step verifies the presence of chassis ground connections between
system components. This procedure does not provide a comprehensive
check of the quality of those connections.

3. Use an ohmmeter to verify the presence of less than 1.0 ohm of resistance
between each of the following points:

FROM TO
PDU A3 Ground Bus Vault ground - Check box when complete
PDU A3 Ground Bus Table/Gantry raceway ground point - Check box when complete
Table/Gantry raceway ground point Gantry - Check box when complete
Table/Gantry raceway ground point Table - Check box when complete
Table/Gantry raceway ground point Operator Console - Check box when complete
All Display or Computing Options Operator Console - Check box when complete
Any room facility patient ground points PDU A4 Ground Bus - Check box when complete

j Check box when complete.

3–9
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

NOTES

3–10
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICA INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

CHAPTER 4 – PDU INTEGRATION

CHAPTER 4 CONTENTS
4–2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4–3 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4–4 PDU Area Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4–5 Initial PDU Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4–6 Suite Emergency Stop Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4–7 Line Transformer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5

4–1 Systems with PDU 2133533

CAUTION This procedure measures potentially hazardous voltages.

4–2 Introduction

Use this procedure to check PDU voltages, test the suite Emergency–stop, and
power up the system.

4–3 Required Tools


D Multimeter with a rating of at least 1000 volts
D Multimeter leads with a rating of at least 1000 volts

4–1
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

4–4 PDU 2133533 Area Designators


ILLUSTRATION 4–1
PDU 2133533 AREA DESIGNATORS

SERVO AMPLIFIER
ASSEMBLY
A1 PANEL

PDU CONTROL
BOARD
A6 PANEL

TRANSFORMER
ASSEMBLY (in back)
A5 PANEL

AC POWER
DISTRIBUTION
A3 PANEL

HVDC SUPPLY
A2 PANEL

INPUT
POWER
A3 PANEL

OUTPUT
CONNECTORS
BULKHEAD
A4 PANEL

4–2
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICA INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 4–2
PDU 2133533 TAP POSITIONS (REAR)

To gain access to the


transformer taps,
remove the rear cover.
Transformer Taps and
Jumpers

2 4 5 6 3 2 4 5 6 3 2 4 5 6 3

H3 H2 H1

NOTE: Remove screws using High Voltage


the cordless or electric screwdriver. Transformer
A5 Panel
5 Locations, Left and Right Sides.

NOTE: Loosen screws.


2 Locations.

ILLUSTRATION 4–3
PDU 2133533 CONTROL BOARD (A6 PANEL)

Room Light Jumper


X–Ray A

Prep B
JP1
Man HVDC

S1 S2
HV Test
Normal

Normal

4–3
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

4–5 Initial Configuration for Systems with PDU 2133533

CAUTION Turn OFF wall power; tag it and lock it off.

4–5–1 Circuit Breakers


Set all circuit breakers to OFF

j Check box when complete.

4–5–2 Relay Board


1. Set SW1 and SW2 to the normal position.
2. Set the Room Light jumper (JP1) to meet hospital requirements.
D Position A enables the room warning light during X–Ray only.
D Position B enables the room warning light as soon as HVDC turns on.
(See Illustration 4–3.)

j Check box when complete.

4–5–3 Power Switches


1. Turn OFF all power switches on all sub–systems (gantry status display box,
STC, DAS, table, console, computer, and SCU).

j Check box when complete.


2. Set the HVDC Enable Key Switch (S1) to DISABLE.

j Check box when complete.

4–5–4 Hardware and Connection Check

Use this step to check mechanical connections, and tighten anything that may have
shaken loose during shipment. Verify all hardware and connections in the PDU are
securely fastened.

j Check box when complete.

4–5–5 Covers

Install, or verify the presence of, all the lexan safety covers.

j Check box when complete.

4–4
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MECHANICA INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

4–6 Suite Emergency Stop Checks


Systems with PDU 2133533

CAUTION Verify all personnel have cleared the system before you turn on wall power.

1. Turn wall power ON to the PDU.


2. Press the suite emergency off button; verify it turns off wall power to the PDU.

j Check box when complete.

4–7 Line Transformer Settings


Systems with PDU 2133533

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU TURNED OFF, TAGGED AND LOCKED THE MAIN WALL
POWER BEFORE YOU CHANGE TAPS. FAILURE TO DISCONNECT POWER
AT MAIN INPUT MAY RESULT IN ELECTROCUTION.

TURN OFF WALL POWER TO CONNECT OR MOVE METER LEADS, OR TO


REMOVE OR INSTALL COVERS.

4–7–1 Line Input Conditions:


1. Remove metal cover over right A3 panel.
2. Monitor the No Load Line to Line Voltage at A3 L1, L2, L3, during the workday.
D Do not record this data during “brown out” conditions.
3. Refer to Table 4–1. After you determine the nearest nominal line, verify the tap
connections match. Refer to Illustration 4–2 for tap locations.
4. Verify that the No Load Line to Line Voltage never falls outside the
corresponding minimum and maximum values listed in the Table.
5. Use a 0–750 AC voltmeter of #4% accuracy to measure the line–to–line voltages
at A3 L1, L2, and L3.
D Verify the highest line–to–line voltage does not exceed 1.02 times the
lowest voltage.
D Example: IF the lowest voltage equals 474, the highest voltage should not
exceed 474 x 1.02 = 483.5 volts.

4–5
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

TABLE 4–1
PDU 2133533 LINE TAP CONNECTION TABLE

NO LOAD TAP
LINE TO LINE CONNECTIONS
VOLTAGES (All 3 phases must be same configuration)

Maximum Phase A Phase B Phase C


Nominal Range Connection Connection Connection
( 8%)
480V 442 to 518 3–4 3–4 3–4
460V 423 to 497 3–5 3–5 3–5
440V 405 to 475 3–6 3–6 3–6
420V 386 to 454 2–4 2–4 2–4
400V 368 to 432 2–5 2–5 2–5
380V 350 to 410 2–6 2–6 2–6

CAUTION Turn off, tag, and lock wall power.

6. Replace the metal cover over the right A3 panel.

j Check box when complete.

Chapter 4 Complete

4–6
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

System Power Up

The power up section has been moved to here from section 4 to facilitate the mechanical installer’s
job.

4–8 System Power Up


1. Turn OFF Wall Power.
2. Turn ON all PDU A3 circuit breakers.

CAUTION Verify all personnel have cleared the system before you turn on wall power.

3. Turn ON wall power.

j Check box when complete.

4–9 Sub–System Power–up


1. Turn ON switch S3 in the table (120vac 24hr power).
2. Push ON the gantry “X–RAY/DRIVES PWR” button located on the gantry side
mounted control.
D X–Ray/Drives power light changes from blinking to continuous on.
3. Turn ON the gantry 120vac enable switch on the gantry status display box.
D Tube fans turn on.
4. Turn ON the DAS power switch, located on the outside of the DAS power supply
assembly.
5. Turn ON the STC power switch, on the STC chassis.
6. Turn ON Table switches, S1 and S2.
7. Leave the console off until you are instructed to turn it on in Section 5.

j Check box when complete.

5–1
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

CHAPTER 5 – COMPUTER INTEGRATION

Usage Note: CT Manufacturing constantly updates this


manual to match product improvements. Use the Installation
book that arrives with the system to install it. Any other
revisions of this manual may not exactly match this system
installation. Use other revisions of this Installation manual for
reference purposes only.

CHAPTER 5 CONTENTS
5–1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5–2 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5–3 Requirements/Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5–4 Install Service Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5–5 Console Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5–6 Keyboard Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5–7 Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5–8 Reconfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5–9 Check/Set Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
5–10 Applications Start–Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
5–11 Restore System State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
5–12 Install Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–17
5–13 Reset Smart Trend Baseline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–19
5–14 Initialize Tube Usage and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–20
5–15 Set–Up Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–21

5–2
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

5–1 Introduction
This chapter describes the Reconfig, System State restore, Options and monitor adjustment
procedures.

5–2 Required Tools

GE Service Key (J25) and Option MOD (optional)

5–3 Requirements/Assumptions:
(1) All stations in a suite must have the same SUITE ID.
(2) You need the name of all hosts in the suite, and their corresponding
Internet/Ethernet numbers.
(3) You need the Internet (IP) addresses the first time you execute a
reconfig on the system.
D When you connect the system to a network, contact the system
administrator to obtain the IP addresses for all the computers in the suite.
D You also need an IP address for each gateway (second) ethernet board in
any OC or IC.
D You can use the default internet number on stand–alone systems.
(stand–alone = not connected to any network)

CAUTION This procedure instructs you to REGEN DATABASE when you execute a
reconfig. REGEN the DATABASE during the initial installation, or Upgrade, of
a System. (The initial Installation or Upgrade assumes the disks do not
contain any Calibration Data.) The reconfig process, described in the
following procedure, destroys any existing system Calibration Data.

5–3
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

5–4 Install Service Key

Install the service key into J25, located on the front of the console.
ILLUSTRATION 5–1
SERVICE KEY LOCATION

Service Key
(top connector)

5–5 Power Up ' Stop for Maintenance


1. Power up the Console.
2. When the window appears ‘Starting up the system . . .’

Select Stop for Maintenance

5–6 Keyboard Configuration

The CT/i System can be used with 1 of 4 keyboards;

D o English – US (default)
D o German – DE
D o Swedish – SE
D o French – FR
The computer leaves the factory configured for the English – US keyboard. If your system is using
that keyboard then continue with section 5–6–2.

5–4
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

5–6–1 Non–English Keyboard Configuration

A screen will pop up with several icons:


D Start System
D Install System Software
D Run Diagnostics
D Recover System
D Enter Command Monitor
D Select Keyboard Layout
1. Use the mouse and click on Select Keyboard Layout
2. Select the appropriate keyboard type. The currently supported keyboards are:
D o English – US (default)
D o German – DE
D o Swedish – SE
D o French – FR
3. Select ”Apply” to reconfigure.

5–6–2 Start System ' Stop the CT/i Auto–Start


1. Select ”Start System”.

2. Stop the CT/i Auto–Start by selecting Cancel when the pink attention window
appears.

5–7 Passwords

Note: Type the text shown in boldface, and press the <enter> key on the keyboard.
(Type/enter bold = Type bold <enter>.)

5–7–1 Default Passwords

Forward production HiSpeed CT/i systems have the following default passwords:
D root: #bigguy <enter>
D ctuser: 4$apps <enter>
D insite: 2getin <enter>
D service: 4rhelp <enter>
GE changed these defaults in response to customer and field requests for tighter security, especially
for systems operating on networks. We suggest you change the default passwords ONLY by
customer request. Then, contact your support center to report the new passwords.

5–5
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

5–8 Reconfig

5–8–1 Reconfig Information

Find the correct values needed to configure the system and record here.

System Configuration
Field Name: ”setenv” Name: Field Value:
System Settings: Service ID SERVICE_ID

Hospital Name HOSPITAL_NAME

Exam Number NEXT_PATIENT_EXAM


_NUMBER
DAS Type DASTYPE
PDU Type PDUTYPE
Network Settings: Gateway Host Name GATEWAY_HOST-
NAME
Gateway IP Address GATEWAY_IP

Gateway Net Mask GATEWAY_NETMASK

Gateway Broadcast GATEWAY_BROAD-


Mask CAST
Suite Name SUITEID

Option Network Printer IP


Address
Option HIS Server IP Address

Option HIS Server AE Title

Option HIS Server AE Port

Option CT Server AE title

Option Connect Pro IP Ad-


dress

5–6
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Record the Networking Application (Image transfer) Configuration

Networking Application (Image Transfer) Configuration


Host name Network address Network Port number Comment
protocol

5–7
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

5–8–2 reconfig the OC

Note: When you reconfigure the OC, you MUST reconfig the SBC. The document collector
box that arrived with your system, contains an OC/SBC System Reconfiguration
procedure, PN 2168070–100 for your reference.

1. Type/enter su – to change to root.


2. Type cd /usr/g/scripts <enter>.
3. Type reconfig <enter> to open the reconfig UIF.
4. Select config <enter> to open the reconfig UIF.

5–8
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 5–2
SYSTEM SETTINGS SCREEN

1. Select Regenerate Database? |Yes| on the first configuration screen, to erase the former
calibration information.
2. Change Hospital Name to the site’s preferred name.
3. Enter the Service ID issued by the service organization. The GENNET_ServiceID default
must be replaced by a valid service ID.
4. Select the Timezone for this site, and record it below.

Region / Time Zone

Notice . . . . . . . If the timezone of your location is not in the selection menu, select one of the
universal times. In this case, automatic changes for daylight–saving time will
not take effect.

5. Enter 1 for Next Patient Exam #


6. Select Preferences to proceed to the next screen.

Notice . . . . . . . The Next MOD#, & Next Diagnostic Exam # are currently not implemented.

5–9
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 5–3
PREFERENCES SETUP SCREEN

Note: Options; Doctor’s Title and Units for patient weight are not currently implemented.
1. Enter the Language to display on the system.
Note: For the 3.5 to 5.0 upgrade, as the INFO file is being read from MOD, it has the old
language value and no language is being selected on the screen. Make sure you have
selected the correct language on the screen.
Note: Language Italian has been removed from the selection menu in the 4.0 M4 / 5.0 M1
software.
2. Select Preferred FastCal KV – select the kVs to be calibrated during FastCal.
Note: These kVs should include all kVs which the site uses for patient scanning.
Deselecting All Preferred FastCal KVs is the same as selecting ALL the Preferred FastCal
KVs.
3. Select the desired Date Format and Time Format.
4. Select the Default Archive Device.
Note: The selection sets up the device for autostore and selects the default archive media
on the browser.
5. Select the desired Dose Information Display. Choose either On (full CTDIw display), On
but without display of the total DLP, or Off (no CTDIw display).
6. Turn on or off the Streak Artifact Reduction as desired.
7. Select Hardware to proceed to the next screen.

5–10
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 5–4
HARDWARE SETTINGS SCREEN

Note: On the HARDWARE screen of the reconfig program you must select the specific
hardware configuration that your gantry has. This information does not reside on the
system state MOD. Look at the ICD cards or rating plates for the DAS, TUBE, PDU and
Collimator to find this information.

1. Select the DAS Type for this system.


2. Select the Tube Type for the system.
3. Select the PDU Type for the system. Note: If the PDU Type of the system is not in the
PDU Type selection, select HSA (46–296220G1) / (46–327106G1).
4. Select the desired Collimator/Filter Type.
5. If you have a Network Image Printer, select it. Next enter it’s Name and IP Address.
Note: A ”PRINT SERVER” IS NOT SUPPORTED (ie: a computer with a printer attached); a
Network Image Printer (which is supported) is a printer directly attached to the network.
6. Camera Setup.
Note: Cameras will be installed later in the Utilities menu in the Service Desktop.

7. Select Network to proceed to the next screen.

5–11
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 5–5
NETWORK SETTINGS SCREEN

Ethernet Tranceiver Bit3 VME


OC SBC
(optional) To VME

Site Subnet (optional) CT/i Scanner Subnet


CT/i Network Topology

1. Host Name identifies the name of this scanner. This name must be unique for the site, and
will appear in unix prompts and in a few other places. If you set up a network connection to
the site, the OC computer will appear on the site’s network as <Host Name>.
2. Suite Name must start with a letter, followed by 3 alphanumeric characters (ie: it MUST be
4 characters long). The name of the Bit–3 OC interface will be <Suite Name>_OC0 and
the Bit–3 SBC interface will be <Suite Name>_SBC0.

If the CT/i scanner is not connected to a ”Site Subnet”, then;


o Verify all other fields are set to the defaults listed in the diagram above, and fields; Host Name
and Suite Name are set to ct01 and CT01 respectively; if you change the Gateway IP Address and
have InSite, you must notify the OnLine Center.
o You should now skip to the step titled *** READY TO INITIATE INSTALLATION ***
on page 5–14.

5–12
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Networking Notes:
The CT/i scanner’s OC computer and SBC computer form the scanner’s subnet. The Bit3 VME to
VME connection is the wire connecting the computers in the subnet. Due to the nature of the VME
to VME direct connection, no other computers can be added to the scanner’s subnet.
The ethernet connection on the OC can connect the scanner’s subnet to the site’s subnet via a
standard Ethernet TCP/IP connection. If the OC’s Ethernet connection is used, then this Ethernet
port is said to be the gateway connecting the scanner’s subnet to the site’s subnet.
If the system you are installing is replacing a Genesis–based HLA or HSA scanner, you can reuse
the networking information from the old scanner as follows:

HLA/HSA Suite Id –––> CT/i Suite Name


HLA/HSA Suite Id –––> CT/i Host Name
HLA/HSA 2 nd Ethernet Gateway IP Address –>CT/i Gateway IP Addr.
HLA/HSA 2 nd Ethernet Gateway Netmask –––>CT/i Gateway Netmask

THE FOLLOWING TWO STEPS ARE CRITICAL FOR ALL CTI/i MACHINES
CONNECTED TO THE INTERNAL NETWORK
3. Enter the Gateway Parameters. The Host Name and IP Address can be found from the
networking manuals kept on each bay or from the data you recorded in section 2.3. The
Net Mask must be set to 255.255.252.0. If the machine is on the 3.7.52.0 network (i.e. the
IP Address begins with 3.7.52) then set the Broadcast Address to 3.7.52.255.

If you have an InSite connection, you must notify the OnLine Center if you change the
Gateway IP Address.
4. Enable a static default route and disable the route daemon.
a. Open a ”Unix Shell” OC window from the Toolchest and become root:
su root <Enter> (then enter the root password)
b. Edit the /etc/config/static–route.options file (using ’vi’)

Add the following line to the end of the file (if using ’vi’, use the down arrow key to
get to the end of the file then press i to insert a line):
$ROUTE $QUIET add default 3.7.52.252

Save the file (if using ’vi’, press Esc and then ZZ)
c. At the operating system prompt type: chkconfig routed off
d. Exit the root session by typing: exit <Enter>
e. Close the Unix Shell window by typing: exit <Enter>
5. The OC and SBC IP Address & Net Mask should always be set to the defaults listed in
the diagram on the previous page.

Note: due to a limitation of the Bit–3 Networking software, the Netmask for the OC and SBC
subnet is always 255.255.255.0.

5–13
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

6. Advanced Options
The Advanced networking options provide support for NIS.
Do not turn on NIS unless requested by the site’s network administrator. Selecting the Use NIS?
option allows the scanner to use the site’s NIS (a.k.a. Yellow Pages) database. The Domain Name
must be provided by the site’s network administrator.

5–8–3 *** READY TO INITIATE INSTALLATION ***


1. When you finish all the configuration screen data parameters, select |Accept| at the top of
the screen.
2. The system will then prompt you to reboot
3. Click on YES
4. The system will automatically login in as ctuser after the reboot.

Select OK on the ”AutoStart Disabled” popup message.

5–14
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

5–8–4 reconfig the SBC


1. Open a UNIX shell.
2. Type/enter cu sbc
3. Login as root
4. Type/enter reconfig
Note: Wait for the SBC reconfig to complete. The software automatically reboots the sbc
when it completes the SBC reconfig.

5. Exit the cu session type ~ .

i.e.: to exit the cu session press the following keys: <tilde><dot><Enter>

5–9 Check/Set Date and Time

Check the date and time.


1. Open a UNIX Shell on the OC.
2. Type/enter su root to change to root.
3. Type/enter setdate
4. Follow the instructions.
5. Verify the dates and times on the OC and the SBC are the same.
6. Type exit <enter>

5–10 Applications Start–Up


1. In the Console shell type: st <Enter>

5–15
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

5–11 Restore System State

Your system may have a system state MOD, located in the software collector box. The system state
MOD contains:
D kV Test Baseline
D Z–Align Baseline
D Collimator Characterization
D Phantom Calibrations
The Installation process uses all the system state files. At this time, use the system state MOD to
restore the Phantom Calibrations and System Characterization files.
If you cannot locate an existing system state MOD, follow instructions in the Installation Manual to
manually Calibrate the Phantom and Characterize the System

1. Select |Restore System State| to open the System State tool.

Computer Integration

New Tube Config


Restore System State
Install Options
Verify Options
___

Computer Diags
Display Diags
Operator I/O Diags
RP Diags

Dismiss

2. Insert the MOD in the top MOD drive.


3. Select |Charact|, |Cals| then |Restore| to restore the System Characterization and
Phantom Calibration files to the system.

5–16
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

5–12 Install Options – (Customer Option(s))

Note: Your system may have a MOD that contains customer purchased options. If your
system has an options MOD install it at this time.

1. Select |Service|

Service
2. Select |SYSTEM INTEGRATION|

SYSTEM
INTEGRATION

3. Select |COMPUTER INTEGRATION|

COMPUTER INTEGRATION
TABLE / GANTRY INTEGRATION
GENERATOR CALIBRATION
DAS INTEGRATION
ALIGNMENTS
SYSTEM TESTS

4. Select |START|

. . . START. . .

5–17
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

5. Select |Install Options|

Computer Integration

New Tube Config


Restore System State
Install Options
Verify Options
___

Computer Diags
Display Diags
Operator I/O Diags
RP Diags

Dismiss

6. Insert the options MOD into the top MOD drive and continue with step 7. If you do not have
an options MOD wait for the box asking you to abort and abort the process.
7. Select the options in the left–hand column to install the corresponding software.
8. Select |install|

5–18
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

5–13 Reset Smart Trend Baseline (not available on all revisions of software)
1. Select |Service|

Service
2. Select |Utilities|

UTILITIES

3. Select |Reset Smart Trend Baseline|

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Reset Smart Trend Baseline

4. Select |START|

. . . START. . .

5–19
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

5–14 Initialize Tube Usage and Options

An application shutdown and start–up is necessary to initialize tube usage and customer options.

1. Select |Application Shutdown|

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Application Shutdown

2. Select |START|

. . . START. . .

After the shutdown is complete:


3. In the Console shell type: st <Enter>

5–20
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

5–15 Monitor Set Up

This chapter describes the steps required to set up the two Display Monitors. The flowchart in
Illustration 5–6 provides an overview of the Monitor Setup procedure. Use the detailed procedures
in the following sections to set up the monitors.
ILLUSTRATION 5–6
MONITOR SETUP FLOWCHART

Start

Factory
Pre–Set

Set
Color
6500K

Adjust Brightness
and Contrast

Adjust H/V Size,


Center and Tilt

Adjust Convergence
Pincushion

End

5–21
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

5–15–1 Monitor Manual Use

The following steps are the proper order to follow for adjustment. You will need to reference the
monitor manual that arrived in the monitor box for specific control procedure.

5–15–2 Factory Pre–Set


1. Reference the monitor manual and reset all adjustments to factory preset levels.

5–15–3 Center the Raster


1. Reference the monitor manual and center the raster.
D The monitors normally have a blank area to the left and right of the display,
to maintain the correct aspect ratio.

5–15–4 Set Monitor Color Temperature


1. Reference the monitor manual and select the 6500K color temperature.

5–15–5 Monitor Brightness and Contrast Set–up

Color monitors have a lower light output than black and white monitors. Take care when you adjust
the monitor brightness & contrast on CT/i systems.
If the operators tell you they think the image on the monitor looks “softer” than the image on the film,
and they like the film, adjust the monitor Brightness and Contrast to compensate for its lower light
output. Use the following procedure to adjust the monitor Brightness and Contrast, until the operator
sees the anatomical structure (window width) at the expected window levels.
1. Adjust the ambient room light to the level used by the operator during image review.
2. Display the Image Works desktop.
3. Display the SMPTE pattern:
D Use the browser to select Exam 1000, which contains the SMPTE pattern,
and enlarge the image to full screen display.
–or–
a. Select the Service Desktop
b. Select |Trouble Shooting|
c. Select |Display Processing|
d. Select |Install SMPTE|
4. Increase the Contrast to maximum.
5. Increase the Brightness to maximum.
6. Decrease the Brightness, until the raster just fades into, and matches, the monitor screen
background.

5–22
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

5–15–6 Adjust the Raster Horizontal and Vertical Size and Tilt.
1. Reference the monitor manual and adjust the horizontal, vertical raster size and tilt.

5–15–7 Adjust Pincushion


1. Reference the monitor manual and adjust the pincushion.

5–15–8 Adjust Convergence


1. Display the Service Desktop Manager.
2. Select |Operator I/O|.
3. Select |Host Diags|.
4. Select the |Monitor| icon.
5. Select |Convergence| from the monitor menu, to display the convergence pattern on the
exam Rx monitor.
Note: Swap video cables to adjust convergence on the display monitor.

6. Reference the monitor manual and adjust the convergence.


7. If you swapped cables to display the convergence pattern on the Display monitor, restore
the cables to the original configuration.
Chapter 5 Complete

5–23
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

NOTES

5–24
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

CHAPTER 6 – TABLE/GANTRY INTEGRATION

Usage Note: CT Manufacturing constantly updates this


manual to match product improvements. Use the Installation
book that arrives with the system to install it. Any other
revisions of this manual may not exactly match this system
installation. Use other revisions of this Installation manual for
reference purposes only.

CHAPTER 6 CONTENTS
6–1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6–2 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6–3 Test 550VDC Enable Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6–3–1 Verify/Perform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6–4 Check Alignment Light Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
6–4–1 Internal Axial Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
6–4–2 External Axial to Internal Axial Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7
6–4–3 Coronal Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7
6–5 Laser Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7
6–6 Alignment Light Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–9
6–7 Intercom Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–9
6–8 Table / Gantry Characterizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–10
6–8–1 Cradle Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11
6–9 Interference Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–13
6–10 Emergency Stop Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–15
Appendix 6A Collimator Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–16
Appendix 6B Tilt Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–19
Appendix 6C Axial Enable & Gantry Door Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–20
Appendix 6D Elevation Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–21

6–1
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

6–1 Introduction

Use the Chapter 6 procedures to functionally check all parts of the table/gantry
subsystem, except the high voltage generator.
(You check the HV Generator in Chapter 9.)

Note: Record the data you collect from this chapter onto form F4879X, located in Chapter
11 of this Installation Manual.

6–2 Required Tools


D Multimeter
D Scope (or Multimeter with Frequency Measurement Capability, such as the
FLUKE 87.)

6–2
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

6–3 Test 550VDC Enable Switch


1. Select |Service|

Service
2. Select |SYSTEM INTEGRATION|

SYSTEM
INTEGRATION

3. Select |TABLE/GANTRY INTEGRATION|

COMPUTER INTEGRATION
TABLE/GANTRY INTEGRATION
GENERATOR CALIBRATION
DAS INTEGRATION
ALIGNMENTS
SYSTEM TESTS

4. Select |START|

. . . START. . .

6–3
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

5. Select |HV DC Enable Switch|

Table/Gantry Installation

HV DC Enable Switch
Characterization
––––
Rotating Power Supply
Table Power Supply
Collimator Checks
Rotor Verification

Dismiss

6. Select the following parameters in the Rotor Functional window:


D MX165 MX200
D Test Selection: Rotor Manual HEMRC
D Rotor Speed: High speed LOW
D Rotor Loop: Closed OPEN
D Rail Diff Voltage: Normal
D Test Duration: 10 seconds
D OBC Service Input: Disabled
7. Verify all personnel have cleared the system, before you
enable the HVDC (550).
8. Verify the following:
a. PDU key switch enabled
b. HVDC (550) enable switch on gantry status display box ON
c. “HVDC (550) ENABLE ON light” on the gantry status display box ON.
9. Select |Run|
D If the system asks for a diagnostic download at this time, answer |YES|, and
wait 90 seconds.
10. Verify the “HVDC (550) BACKUP CONTACTOR CLOSED LIGHT” on the gantry
status display box turns ON.
11. When the test finishes, verify the system displays the following message along the
bottom of the plasma screen: Diagnostics have completed with zero errors reported.

6–4
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

6–3–1 Verify/Perform
1. Turn off the HVDC (550) enable switch on the gantry status display box.
2. Select |RUN| to run the test again.
3. Verify the test aborts.
4. Verify the message log contains the following error: Gentry I/O backup contactor
error.
1. Turn on the HVDC (550) enable switch on the gantry status display box.
2. Select |File, Exit|
3. Select |Dismiss|
4. Select |Cleanup|
5. Wait 90 seconds for the message “Scanning Hardware Reset Successful.” to appear
on the screen

j Check box when complete.

6–5
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

6–4 Check Alignment Light Position

CAUTION Verify all personnel have cleared the system. The Gantry rotates to 180
degrees during this check.

1. Press the alignment light button on the table, to position the gantry.
2. Press the alignment light button on the table, again, to turn the lights off.
3. Turn OFF the axial drive enable and HVDC (550) enable switches on the gantry
status display box.
4. Use the switch on the gantry control assembly, located near the collimator, to
manually turn on the alignment lights.
D Access the switch through the opening in the center of the gantry, between the
front and back shrouds.

WARNING NEVER STARE DIRECTLY INTO THE LASER BEAMS WHEN YOU OPERATE
THE ALIGNMENT LIGHTS. STARING INTO THE BEAMS CAN CAUSE
PERMANENT EYE DAMAGE.
j Check box when complete.

6–4–1 Internal Axial Lights


1. Place a sheet of plain white paper over the output port of each light.
2. Verify that the two lines line up on each other.

Note: GE designed the internal axial lasers on the HiSpeed Advantage system to
shine “down” on the collimator. Do NOT adjust the internal alignment lights
at this time. The tomographic plane tests use the QA phantom, in Chapter 10,
to check the internal axial lasers alignment to the collimator.

j Check box when complete.

6–6
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

6–4–2 External Axial to Internal Axial Distance


1. Raise the table to its highest elevation.
2. Extend the cradle until you see both the internal and external laser lights shining on
the cradle.
3. Place a metric rule on the right edge of the cradle, and measure the distance from
the internal axial laser line to the external axial line.
D Verify this distance equals 310.0 mm 1.0 mm.
4. Place the rule on the left edge of the cradle, and measure again.
5. Leave the cradle in its current position, and lower the table to the minimum
elevation.
6. Measure the distance between the internal and external lights on both edges of the
cradle, as above.
D Verify the distance remains equal to 310.0 mm 1.0 mm.

j Check box when complete.

6–4–3 Coronal Lights


1. Place a sheet of plain white paper at the left side of the patient opening, in front of
the coronal laser light.
D Verify the two coronal lines coincide.
2. Move the paper to the right side of the patient opening.
D Verify the two coronal lines coincide.
3. Place the paper in the center of the Gantry opening.
D Use a level to verify that the coronal lines are horizontal.

j Check box when complete.

6–5 Laser Warning Labels


1. Refer to Illustration 6–1.
2. Make sure the outside of the gantry has that its product labels in the proper
locations.
3. Obtain and install replacements for any missing labels.

6–7
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 6–1
LASER WARNING AND PRECAUTIONS

Note: The laser assemblies, inside the gantry, have three laser radiation warning
labels attached directly to the assemblies, or their power inputs.
Note: This label varies slightly for the 635nm laser.

LASER
APERTURE
DO NOT STARE
INTO BEAM

CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM LASER RADIATION
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT
670 MM LASER DIODE
1.0 MILLIWATT MAXIMUM OUTPUT
CLASS II LASER PRODUCT

4. Close the front cover of the gantry.

j Check box when complete.

6–8
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

6–6 Alignment Light Visibility

HHS requirements state that any light used to define the tomographic plane must be
visible under ambient light conditions, up to 500 lux.
1. Turn on the scan room lights to their brightest normal level.
D Do not add localized spot lights to increase the brightness level.
2. Raise the table to its highest position, advance the cradle into the gantry, and turn
on the alignment lights.
3. Use your hand to check laser visibility:
a. Center the back of your hand over the cradle, and position it over the table, until
the external axial alignment light shines on it.
b. Make sure you can see the axial alignment light, it doesn’t matter whether or not
you see the sagittal or coronal lights.
4. Use the back of your hand to check the internal axial alignment light visibility.
5. If you cannot see the external or internal axial lights on the back of your hand in
ambient light conditions:
a. Obtain a DIGAPHOT model #3300 or 3303 light meter.
b. Measure the ambient light intensity at the cradle surface, in the external and
internal alignment light locations.

Note: Footcandles x 10.76=lux.

D If the light reading(s) exceed 500 lux, reduce the room lighting to 500 lux and
repeat Step 3. and Step 4.
–or–
D If the light meter readings equal 500 lux or less, replace the laser light(s) and/or
their power supplies.

j Check box when complete.

6–7 Intercom Check

Make sure the intercom talk and listen functions work.

j Check box when complete.

6–9
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

6–8 Table / Gantry Characterizations


ILLUSTRATION 6–1
CHARACTERIZATION FLOWCHART

Start

System State No
MOD
Restored in
Section 5?

Yes
Appendix 6A
Collimator Characterization

Appendix 6B
Tilt Characterization

Cradle Characterization
Section 6–8–1

End

6–10
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

6–8–1 Cradle Characterization


1. Select |Cradle|

File Help
Mechanical Characterization Tool

Hardware
Reset

Characterize

Tilt

Table
Elevation

Cradle

Data View
Collimator
Data

Charact
Limits

View
Values

View
Log

2. Follow the Cradle Characterization instructions displayed on the screen.


IMPORTANT METAL FREE CRADLE CHARACTERIZATION INFORMATION:
The following changes apply to the on–screen directions for alignment light and
end–of–cradle position characterization steps, for tables equipped with the
METAL–FREE cradle only.
a. In the alignment light procedure (3rd and 4th screens), use the BLACK DOT on the
cradle right–side bumper, instead of the black stripe, for both steps.

Note: Elevate the table to at least 40mm from isocenter, so the black dot reaches the
external scan plane alignment light before the cradle reaches its home position.

b. In the end–of–cradle position procedure (5th screen), use the same BLACK DOT
on the cradle right–side bumper, instead of the end of the cradle.

6–11
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 6–2
CRADLE CHARACTERIZATION PIN LOCATIONS

Cradle Characterization Pin


Storage Location
(Under Front Cover)

ÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
Cradle Characterization Pin
Rear Characterization Location

ÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ Cradle Characterization Pin

ÀÀ
etc board
Front Characterization Location

CT38886A

Gantry

j Check box when complete.

6–12
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

6–9 Interference Test

Reset the hardware to download the new characterization values to the ETC, OBC, and
STC, before proceeding to the table/gantry interference test on this page.

Note: If the following elevation and/or tilt display readings fail to meet specifications, DO
NOT adjust the limit switches. Instead, re–characterize elevation and/or tilt.

1. Select |Hardware Reset|

File Help
Mechanical Characterization Tool

Hardware
Reset

Characterize

Tilt

Table
Elevation

Cradle

Data View
Collimator
Data

Charact
Limits

View
Values

View
Log

Note: Press only the “fast” pushbutton to display the elevation limits for the present
elevation/tilt combination.

2. Move the cradle to the home position:


a. Use the Down pushbutton to lower the table to the minimum height.
b. Make sure the elevation display reads 577.5 3 mm.
c. Use the Up pushbutton to raise the table to the maximum height.
d. Make sure the elevation display reads 25.5 3 mm.

6–13
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Note: Minus (–) tilt means the top of the gantry tilts away from the table.
Plus (+) tilt means the top of the gantry tilts toward the table.

3. Advance the cradle about 36 inches from the home position.


a. Tilt the gantry to –23 degrees.
b. Use the Down pushbutton to lower the table until it automatically stops.
c. Make sure the elevation display reads 115.5 3 mm.
d. Make sure the table clears the gantry covers by at least 1/2 inch.
4. Tilt the gantry to –20 degrees.
a. Use the Down pushbutton to lower the table until it automatically stops.
b. Make sure the elevation display reads 209.5 3 mm.
c. Make sure the table clears the gantry covers by at least 1/2 inch.
5. Use the Up pushbutton to raise the table until the elevation display reads between
115.5mm and 209.5mm.
a. Tilt the gantry to –10 degrees.
b. Tilt the gantry away from the table; make sure it stops at –22.0 0 degrees.
c. Tilt the gantry toward the table; make sure it stops at +18.5 0 degrees.
6. Return the cradle to home position.
a. Make sure you can tilt the gantry to 30.0 degrees.
b. Leave gantry tilted to –30 degrees for now.
7. Raise the table until you can move the cradle.
a. Advance the cradle about 12 inches from the home position.
b. Use the Home Button to return the cradle to the home position, tilt the gantry to
0 degrees, and lower the table to minimum height.
c. Make sure you cannot move the cradle at table heights below 209.5 3mm.
d. Verify that the cradle lock indicator on the gantry display is lit.
8. Select |File, Exit|
9. Select |Dismiss|
10. Select |Cleanup|

j Check box when complete.

6–14
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

6–10 Emergency Stop Check


1. Use the table pushbuttons to advance the cradle about 2 feet
from the home position.
2. Press one of the X–RAY DRIVES POWER OFF (Red) buttons on the gantry.
3. Make sure the X–RAY DRIVES POWER shuts off, and the white button flashes.
4. Depress one of the table elevation buttons, to verify the emergency stop disabled
table elevation.
5. Depress one of the cradle drive buttons, to verify the emergency stop disabled the
cradle drive.
6. Press one of the flashing white buttons turn on X–RAY DRIVES POWER.
7. Press the other X–RAY DRIVES POWER OFF button on the gantry.
a. Make sure the X–RAY DRIVES POWER shuts off.
b. Manually move the cradle to the home position to make sure the cradle clutch
released.
c. Make sure the cradle latches securely in the home position.
8. Press one of the flashing white buttons turn on X–RAY DRIVES POWER.
9. Press one of the four table tape switches to make sure the X–RAY DRIVES
POWER shuts off.
a. Turn on X–RAY DRIVES POWER.
b. Repeat with the three remaining table tape switches.
10. Press the console emergency stop switch, and make sure the X–RAY DRIVES
POWER shuts off.
11. Turn on X–RAY DRIVES POWER.

j Check box when complete.


Chapter 6 Complete

6–15
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

APPENDIX 6A COLLIMATOR CHARACTERIZATION

1. Select |TABLE/GANTRY INTEGRATION|

COMPUTER INTEGRATION
TABLE/GANTRY INTEGRATION
GENERATOR CALIBRATION
DAS INTEGRATION
ALIGNMENTS
SYSTEM TESTS

2. Select |START|

. . . START. . .

3. Select |Characterization|

Table/Gantry Installation

HV DC Enable Switch
Characterization
––––
Rotating Power Supply
Table Power Supply
Collimator Checks
Rotor Verification

Dismiss

6–16
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

4. Select |Collimator Data|

File Help
Mechanical Characterization Tool

Hardware
Reset

Characterize

Tilt

Table
Elevation

Cradle

Data View
Collimator
Data

Charact
Limits

View
Values

View
Log

6–17
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

6–10–1 Verify/Perform
1. Verify, or type/enter, the collimator characterization values:
D If you loaded the System State MOD during Chapter 6, verify the collimator
characterization values on the plasma screen match the values on the collimator
characterization label, then select Continue.
–or–
D If you did not load System State MOD, type/enter the characterization values
listed on the collimator characterization label.

Note: Data Entry Hints

Use the following method to quickly change the information in a Graphical User Interface
(GUI) data field. You can use this method in any GUI that requires an update to existing
information in a data field.
1. Highlight the current text in the field:
a. Press and hold the left mouse button.
b. Drag the cursor across the data to highlight it.
2. Press the [Backspace] key to clear the field.
3. Type the new data into the field, and press [Enter].
4. Select |Continue|
5. If you entered new values, watch for the message which states the characterization
successfully completed.

j Check box when complete.

6–18
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

APPENDIX 6B TILT CHARACTERIZATION

1. Select |Tilt|

File Help
Mechanical Characterization Tool

Hardware
Reset

Characterize

Tilt

Table
Elevation

Cradle

Data View
Collimator
Data

Charact
Limits

View
Values

View
Log

2. Follow the Tilt Characterization instructions displayed on the screen.

j Check box when complete.

6–19
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

APPENDIX 6C AXIAL ENABLE SWITCH TEST

1. Turn OFF the axial drive enable switch on the gantry display box.
D For the initial condition, do not leave the tube at the 6 o’clock position.
2. Close the Gantry front cover.
3. Clear the Gantry area for rotation.
4. Press the table alignment light pushbutton.
5. Verify that the Gantry did not rotate.

j Check box when complete.


6. Turn ON the axial drive enable switch on the gantry display box.
7. Press the table alignment light pushbutton.
8. Verify that the Gantry rotates.

j Check box when complete.


9. Turn OFF the axial drive enable switch on the gantry display box.
10. Open the front gantry shroud.
11. Manually rotate the gantry a few degrees from the current position.
12. Turn ON the axial drive enable switch on the gantry display box.
13. Press the table alignment light pushbutton.
14. Verify that the Gantry did not rotate.

j Check box when complete.


15. Turn OFF the axial drive enable switch on the gantry display box.
16. Close the Gantry front cover.

6–20
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

APPENDIX 6D ELEVATION CHARACTERIZATION

6–10–2 Elevation Characterization


1. Remove upper right and lower right table covers.
2. Locate the small L–shaped measurement block, stored on top of the bigger
measurement block.
a. Remove the small L–shaped measurement block from its storage position.
b. Install it in its characterization position, at the right rear of the table.
c. Move the measurement plate, on the right side of table, to the “out” position.
d. Tighten the mounting screws for both plates.
3. Select |Table Elevation|

File Help
Mechanical Characterization Tool

Hardware
Reset

Characterize

Tilt

Table
Elevation

Cradle

Data View
Collimator
Data

Charact
Limits

View
Values

View
Log

4. Follow the Elevation Characterization instructions displayed on the screen.


D Important: Take care to measure the exact elevation distances. Incorrect
measurement results in Elevation Characterization failure.

6–21
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Note: Refer to Illustration 6–3. Measure the elevation distance as vertically as possible.
Measure between the bottom surface of the each measurement block and the
center of the rear leg upper pivot pin.

5. Return the measurement plates to the storage position.


ILLUSTRATION 6–3
MEASURE ELEVATION DISTANCE

Rear leg upper pivot pin

Center
Line

Bottom Side Weldment Plate

LOWER POSITION DISTANCE = 14.7 INCHES (373.4MM)

Lower Position Distance: Measure between the center line of the rear leg’s
upper pivot pin to the bottom of the rear measurement block.

Rear leg upper pivot pin

Center
Line

Bottom Side Weldment Plate

UPPER POSITION DISTANCE = 36.44 INCHES (925.6MM)

Upper Position Distance: Measure between the center line of the rear leg’s
upper pivot pin to the bottom of the right side measurement block.

j Check box when complete.

6–22
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

CHAPTER 7 – DAS INTEGRATION

Usage Note: CT Manufacturing constantly updates this


manual to match product improvements. Use the Installation
book that arrives with the system to install it. Any other
revisions of this manual may not exactly match this system
installation. Use other revisions of this Installation manual for
reference purposes only.

This section has been changed as part of a process improvement.


1. Turn off the Axial Drive Switch.
2. Slowly rotate the gantry by hand through 1 revolution.

While rotating listen for any loose hardware.

7–1
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

NOTES

7–2
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/I INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

CHAPTER 8 – SYSTEM ALIGNMENTS

Usage Note: CT Manufacturing constantly updates this


manual to match product improvements. Use the Installation
book that arrives with the system to install it. Any other
revisions of this manual may not exactly match this system
installation. Use other revisions of this Installation manual for
reference purposes only.

CHAPTER 8 CONTENTS
8–1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2
8–2 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3
8–3 Gantry Geometry Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3
8–4 Site Ground Current Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4
8–5 Z Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–5
8–6 Plane of Rotation (POR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–7
8–7 X–Ray Beam on Detector Window( BOW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–11
8–7–1 Install Alignment Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–12
8–7–2 Scan Tool and Adjust Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–13
8–8 Create Z Alignment Baseline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–14
8–9 Isocenter (ISO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–15
8–10 CBF (Center Body Filter) and SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–17
Appendix 8A Radial Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–18
Appendix 8B Signal/Noise Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–22

IMPORTANT:
D YOU MUST RECORD THE DATA COLLECTED IN THIS CHAPTER ON FORM
F4879, LOCATED IN CHAPTER 11 OF THIS BOOK.
D LOCATE THE HHS DATA, SENT FROM THE FACTORY, IN THE SOFTWARE
COLLECTOR BOX. RETAIN THIS DATA WITH THE HHS DATA COLLECTED
AT THE SITE.

8–1
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/I INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

8–1 Introduction

Use this procedure to make sure the X–Ray beam focuses directly upon the detector window. The
flowchart in Illustration 8–1 shows an overview of this chapter.
ILLUSTRATION 8–1
SYSTEM ALIGNMENT OVERVIEW

Note: If you did not restore the system state


Start MOD in Section 5 you must perform
Generator Integration before this
Section.

Site Ground
Current Checks

Does Z–Align No
POR
Baseline Exist?

Yes

BOW

Z–Align
Wait 15 Min.

Create Z–Align
Baseline

ISO
CBF
SAG

End

8–2
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/I INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

8–2 Required Tools


D Beckman 3030 meter or equivalent
D Beckman CT231 clamp–on Amp probe: 46–194427P228
(Fits up to #2 size wire)
D Beckman CT232 clamp–on Amp probe: 46–194427P270
(Fits #1 size wire and larger)
D ECOS 1023H Power Line–Leakage Current Tester (60HZ): 46–194427P248
D Adapter Cables for Power Line–Leakage Current Tester: 46–194427P249
D Polaroid type 52 film D Film developer
D Caliper Dial indicators D Masking tape
D Socket set D Torque wrench
D BOW alignment tools D 48cm Phantom
D Radial alignment tools D Dial indicator mount
D Radial dial indicator

8–3 Gantry Geometry Definitions


Theta (Also known as ISO) Along the tangent to Gantry rotation, on the rotating structure. Move the
X–Ray tube to the 180_ (6 o’clock) position to equal 0_ Theta.
D You can adjust the tube unit and collimator in the Theta direction.
Z Axis Parallel to the axis of Gantry rotation, in the direction of cradle motion.
D You can adjust the tube unit and detector in the Z–axis direction.
D Positive Z Axis direction: Move the tube/detector toward the table
D Negative Z Axis direction: Move the tube/detector away from the table
Radial Along the radius, from the center of Gantry rotation, in and out from Gantry isocenter.
D You can adjust the detector in the Radial direction.

Note: You cannot adjust the tube or collimator in the Radial direction. The Gantry design fixes this
dimension.

ILLUSTRATION 8–2
GANTRY GEOMETRY

Theta (ISO)
Radial
Theta (ISO)

Detector
Scan Plane
Tube

Z–Align

0 degrees Theta

8–3
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/I INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

8–4 Site Ground Current Checks

Check the site ground current before you proceed to the System Alignments.
Required Tools:
D Beckman 3030 meter or equivalent
D Beckman CT231 clamp–on Amp probe: 46–194427P228
(Fits up to #2 size wire)
D Beckman CT232 clamp–on Amp probe: 46–194427P270
(Fits #1 size wire and larger)
1. Power ON all equipment; NO X–Ray, and NO Gantry rotation.
2. Set meter range to the AC Current 2M switch position.
D Because the Amp probes equal 1000:1, the 2M range may give a 0.123 reading, which
equals 123 milliamps.
3. Use the appropriate clamp–on probe to measure the ground current at the following locations.
(Each location lists the maximum allowable current in parentheses.)
D A1 main system ground to PDU _________. (<300 mA)
D Operator Console #2 ground wire to Table Raceway _______. (<60 mA)
D Table #2 ground wire to Table Raceway. _________ (<40 mA)
D Gantry #2 ground wire to Table Raceway. _________ (<40 mA)
D PDU 1/0 ground wire to Table Raceway. _________ (<120 mA)
D Independent Console #2 ground wire to PDU. _________ (<60 mA)
D Second Independent Console #2 ground wire to PDU. _______ (<60 mA)
4. If any of these measurements exceed the specified maximum, use the System Ground Connection
Illustration, located at the end of Chapter 2 of this Direction, to check the chassis ground.
D If you cannot resolve the problem, contact your District CT engineer for assistance.

j Check box when complete.

8–4
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/I INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

8–5 Z Alignment

Use the Z–Align tool to speed up system installation and tube changes. The Z–Align procedure verifies
that your POR and BOW still meet specifications, relative to the last alignment of the system. Acquire
a Z–Align baseline scan to take advantage of this feature.

Note: Start this procedure with a cold X–Ray tube. Wait 15 minutes after the last diagnostic scan,
and 90 minutes after the last patient exposure before you take the Z–Alignment scan.

1. Select |SERVICE|

Service
2. Select |SYSTEM INTEGRATION|

SYSTEM
INTEGRATION

3. Select |SYSTEM ALIGNMENTS|

COMPUTER INTEGRATION
TABLE/GANTRY INTEGRATION
GENERATOR CALIBRATION
DAS INTEGRATION
SYSTEM ALIGNMENTS
SYSTEM TESTS

4. Select |START|

. . . START. . .

8–5
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/I INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

5. Select |Z–Align|

AlignmentInstallation
Z–Align
ISO Alignment
CBF and SAG Align
–––
POR Alignment
BOW Alignment
Radial Alignment
S/N Tube Output

Dismiss

6. Check for the presence of a Z–Align reference baseline.


a. A gray Z–Align softkey means no baseline exists.
D Exit this function, and proceed to the Plane of Rotation (POR) adjustment, in section
8–6.
–or–
b. A black Z–Align softkey means a baseline exists; proceed with the following steps.
7. Position the tube to 0 degrees.
8. Select |Z–Align|
9. Press (Start Scan) when it flashes.
10. The screen displays either:
a. “The Tube is Aligned in the Z–Direction. No movement is needed.”
D Exit and proceed to ISO alignment, in section 8–9, on page 8–15.
–or–
b. Fail – Move the tube the distance and direction indicated on the screen.
D Move the tube, and repeat the Z–Align Air Scan.
D Continue this process until the Z–Align Tool reports back “The Tube is aligned in the
Z direction. No movement is needed”, then proceed to the ISO Alignment, on page
8–15.
11. Check the corresponding box on FORM 4879 (Chapter 11), to indicate that you used Z–Align.

8–6
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/I INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

8–6 Plane of Rotation (POR)


1. Start this procedure with a cold X–Ray tube unit.
D If you acquired any low technique scans prior to beginning the Plane of Rotation, wait at
least 5 minutes before you start this alignment procedure.
–or–
D If you recently acquired image scans, and want to re–check the Plane of Rotation, wait at
least 90 minutes, to allow the tube unit to cool. (Wait 90 minutes, if the tube unit had more
than 25 Kilojoules exposure, [KV x mA x Sec 1000] within the last 30 minutes.)
2. Mount the phantom holder, and 48cm phantom on the cradle.
3. Refer to Illustration 8–3. Tape a type 52 film at the 3:00 o’clock position on the outside edge of the
48cm phantom, so the film projects into the Gantry.
D When exposed and developed, the film shows the alignment of the two beams with the
table, at the left, as viewed from the X–Ray tube in the 3:00 o’clock position.
4. Advance the cradle, and use the alignment lights to position the film for an exposure near the image
center mark on the film pack.
5. Select |POR Alignment|

AlignmentInstallation
Z–Align
ISO Alignment
CBF and SAG Align
–––
POR Alignment
BOW Alignment
Radial Alignment
S/N Tube Output

Dismiss

6. Select |10mm Scan|


7. Select |Accept|
8. Press (Start Scan) when it flashes.
9. Remove the film, mark the table side of the film, and develop it.
10. Refer to Illustration 8–3. Verify that the narrow (white beam) exposure lies within the wider (gray)
X–Ray exposure.

8–7
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/I INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

11. Examine the edges of the two exposures in the Z direction.


D Both edges of each beam should be equally well defined by the exit slit of the collimator,
with the edges of the narrow beam much sharper than the wide beam.
D If a difference in edge definition exists, check for gross Z misalignment. (Misalignment of
the slit in the tube collimator adapter may cause the fuzzy edge.)
12. Refer to Illustration 8–3. Measure the 10mm exposure to determine the plane of rotation.
a. Use a Vernier Caliper or comparable instrument with mm, or inch, scale to measure
the widths of the wide beam that extend past the edges of the narrow beam.
b. Call these dimensions XF (front distance) and XR (rear distance).
13. To calculate the amount of required movement:
a. Type/enter the XF and XR values on the POR screen to automatically calculate and
display the distance.
14. To adjust the tube:
a. Barely loosen the large circular knurled nut.
b. Loosen the four (4) mounting bolts located on the Gantry/Tube mounting bracket.
c. Reposition tube, and tighten the bolts and nut.
15. If the 10mm beam exposure does not meet specification, adjust the tube by the required amount,
wait 5 minutes, and repeat previous steps.
D Recommended: Install a dial indicator on the bracket attached to the collimator mounting
bracket and bearing, on the adjacent Gantry surface. Zero the indicator before you loosen
the mounting bolts, then observe the amount of indicator shift as you loosen the mounting
bolts. Take this shift into consideration when you adjust the tube, so you obtain the correct
adjustment distance after you tighten the mounting bolts.
D Measure the exposure. Verify that the tube is in spec using the automatic program.
D Wait 5 minutes, then proceed to the 1.0mm aperture exposure.

8–8
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/I INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION 8–3
PLANE OF ROTATION

XR
XF

THIS PICTURE SHOWS HOW TO


MEASURE XF AND XR.
IT IS NOT INTENEDED TO
REPRESENT A GOOD OR BAD POR.

NARROW BEAM
TUBE AT
270_ THETA

NARROW BEAM
TUBE AT
90 _THETA

TAPE
FILM
HERE

48cm
PHANTOM

GANTRY

TAPE
FILM
HERE TABLE

ct2721

8–9
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/I INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

16. Select |POR Alignment|

AlignmentInstallation
Z–Align
ISO Alignment
CBF and SAG Align
–––
POR Alignment
BOW Alignment
Radial Alignment
S/N Tube Output

Dismiss

17. Select |1mm Scan|


18. Select |Accept|
19. Press (Start Scan) when it flashes.
20. Remove and develop the film pack.
21. Inspect the resulting film: (You do not have to measure the beam widths.)
D Make sure you can see the edges of the wide beam on either side of the narrow beam
22. When the Plane of Rotation meets specification, tighten the four tube mounting bolts to a torque of
25 +2 ft. lbs.

Note: Hand–tighten the circular knurled nut to prevent the Z adjust lever from rattling loose.

23. Record the completion of POR on FORM 4879 (Chapter 11).

j Check box when complete.

8–10
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/I INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

8–7 X–Ray Beam on Detector Window (BOW)


1. Start this procedure with a cold X–Ray tube unit.
D If you acquired any low technique scans prior to beginning the Beam on Window test, wait at
least 5 minutes before you start this alignment procedure.
–or–
D If you recently acquired image scans, and want to re–check the BOW, wait at least 30
minutes, to allow the tube unit to cool, if the tube unit had more than 25 Kilojoules exposure,
[KV x mA x Sec 1000] within the last 30 minutes.
2. Remove any objects from the the Detector Field of view.
3. Enable the Gantry Loop Contractor switch.
4. Select |BOW Alignment|

AlignmentInstallation
Z–Align
ISO Alignment
CBF and SAG Align
–––
POR Alignment
BOW Alignment
Radial Alignment
S/N Tube Output

Dismiss

5. Select |Position the Tube|; 0 degrees


6. Select |Take Air Scan|

8–11
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/I INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

8–7–1 Install Alignment Hardware

After the Air Scan completes, install the BOW alignment tools (masking plates).
1. Turn OFF the Gantry loop contactor switch.
2. Turn OFF the Gantry HVDC (550) enable switch.
3. Make sure the X–Ray tube remains in the 12 o’clock position, (0_ Gantry position).

Note: Take care when handling the precision tooling unit.

4. Refer to Illustration 8–4. (Critical for Detector proper alignment)


a. Position the masking plates in the 3 locations specified in the illustration.
b. Make sure the masking plates lay flat, and come in direct contact with the Detector
Window.
c. Orient the shorter length sides of the trapezoidal openings of the tools toward the
Gantry mounting plate.
ILLUSTRATION 8–4
DETECTOR MASKING PLATE ORIENTATION (HILIGHT SYSTEM)
DETECTOR
WINDOW

6.5” 6.5”

SHORT LENGTH SIDE OF TRAPEZOIDAL


OPENING OF DETECTOR MASK PLATES
FACING GANTRY MOUNTING PLATE
5. Turn ON the Gantry loop contactor switch.
6. Turn ON the Gantry HVDC (550) enable switch.

8–12
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/I INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

8–7–2 Scan Tool and Adjust Detector


1. Select |Bow tool scan|
2. Press (Start Scan) when it flashes.
3. Upon completion of the BOW tool scan, the system automatically calculates and displays the
required amount of adjustment.
D If the system displays the message, “The detector is within alignment,” proceed to step 6.
D To adjust the detector, proceed to step 4.
4. Refer to illustration A–3, on page 8–21.
a. Loosen all three detector mounting nuts, even if you plan to adjust only one or two.
b. Loosen the adjustment locking nuts only on the mounts which require adjustment.
c. Use the locking nut flats as a reference, and turn the mounting studs by the
specified number of flats, to bring the detector into alignment.

Note: Turn the mounting studs CW to move the detector toward the Gantry

d. Hold the adjustment stud with a wrench, and re–tighten the adjustment locking nut.
e. Re–tighten the detector mounting nuts.
D Torque each of the inside detector mounting nuts to 25 ft–lbs.
D Hold the lower mounting nut, to prevent it turning, while you tighten the outside
nut to 25 ft–lbs.

Note: Do not over tighten the mounting nuts. Because the detector no longer has shocks, excess
can twist and damage it.

5. Re–check adjustment with BOW program, and repeat until the system displays the message
“Detector is within alignment.”
6. Record the BOW result on FORM 4879 (Chapter 11).
7. Select |Dismiss| to close the BOW Alignment window.
8. Turn OFF the loop contactor switch
9. Turn OFF the Gantry HVDC (550) enable switch.
10. Remove the window alignment hardware from the detector.
11. Turn ON the loop contactor switch in Gantry.
12. Turn ON the Gantry HVDC (550) enable switch.

j Check box when complete.

8–13
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/I INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

8–8 Create Z Alignment Baseline

GE designed the Z–Align tool to decrease system installation and tube change times. Acquire a Z–Align
baseline scan, to take advantage of this feature. Make sure the system POR and BOW fall within
specifications before you create the Z–Alignment Baseline.
1. Start this procedure with a cold X–Ray tube unit.
D Wait at least 15 minutes after the last BOW exposure.
2. Select |Z–Align|

AlignmentInstallation
Z–Align
ISO Alignment
CBF and SAG Align
–––
POR Alignment
BOW Alignment
Radial Alignment
S/N Tube Output

Dismiss

3. Position the tube to 0 degrees.


4. Select |Create Baseline|
5. Select |Accept|
6. Press (Start Scan) when it flashes.
7. The system acquires the Z–Alignment Baseline scan, and displays the Z–Align data on the screen.
8. Exit the Z–Align screen, and proceed to the ISO Alignment.

j Check box when complete.

8–14
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/I INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

8–9 Isocenter (ISO)


1. Start this procedure with a cold X–Ray tube unit.
D If you acquired any low technique scans prior to beginning the Isocenter test, wait at least 5
minutes before you start this alignment procedure.
–or–
D If you recently acquired image scans, and want to re–check the ISO, wait at least 90
minutes, to allow the tube unit to cool. (Wait 90 minutes, if the tube unit had more than 25
Kilojoules exposure, [KV x mA x Sec 1000] within the last 30 minutes.)
2. Select |ISO Alignment|

AlignmentInstallation
Z–Align
ISO Alignment
CBF and SAG Align
–––
POR Alignment
BOW Alignment
Radial Alignment
S/N Tube Output

Dismiss

3. Remove any objects from the Detector’s Field of view.


4. Drive the Gantry to the 0 degree (upright) Tilt position
5. Enable the Gantry Loop Contractor switch.
6. Select |Take Air Scans|
7. Select |Accept|
8. Press (Start Scan) when it flashes.
9. After the system creates the AIR CAL files:
a. Follow the proper safety protocol to access the Gantry
b. Attach a round, 1/8” diameter metal shaft (0.125 inch shaft diameter) to the end of
the table nearest the Gantry, or on phantom holder.
c. Turn ON the laser alignment lights.
d. Advance and adjust the table to position the metal shaft 1.4” up and 1.4” right of
Isocenter.
e. Make sure the shaft remains level (perpendicular to the scan plane.)
Note: IMPORTANT: Always use a round 1/8” diameter metal shaft. Never position the metal shaft
directly on ISO center, always offset it.

The Software program that calculates tube movement for ISO Center looks for a Sinusoidal
waveform generated by the off center metal shaft. A metal shaft, positioned at Isocenter, generates
a waveform consisting of a straight line.

8–15
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/I INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

10. Select |Take Tool Scan|


D The system displays a message that describes the distance and direction required to bring
the tube into alignment. Continue to adjust the tube position, and acquire ISO air and pin
scans, until the software displays a tube–in–alignment message. The tube adjustment
process begins with step 11.

Note: Replace the tube if the distance between the large and small focal spots exceeds 0.16
channels.

The system ISO equals the average of the large and small ISO values. This value should
equal 373.75 0.02 channels.

Whenever the system ISO falls outside the 373.75 0.1 channel window, create a new
small and large AIR CAL.

11. Select the Starrett #25–141 gauge (0.001 inch to 0.250 inch), attached to the nonmagnetic holding
fixture, and bolt the gauge and its holding fixture to the special tube mounting bracket.
12. Zero out gauge before you loosen the mounting bolts.
13. Loosen the four mounting bolts (9/16I) that fasten the tube unit to the Gantry mounting plate.
14. Loosen the top 3/4 inch nut on the vertical adjustment screw.
15. Move the tube in the recommended distance and direction, as measured by the ISOCENTER
gauge.
D Turn the vertical adjustment screw clockwise turn to move the tube up.
D Turn the vertical adjustment screw counterclockwise
to move the tube down.
16. Tighten the tube mounting bolts, and torque to 25 2 ft. lbs.
17. Repeat ISO Scans until the ISOCENTER meets the specification.

Note: If ISO falls outside 373.75 0.1 channels, you do not have to wait between tube adjustment
and the test scan.

If ISO projects between 0.02 and 0.1 Channels, wait 5 minutes after you adjust the tube
before you scan.

If ISO projects within 373.75 0.02 channels, wait 5 minutes then repeat the scan to verify
the results remain within spec.

18. Wait 5 minutes, then recheck POR with the 10mm aperture, to verify the plane of rotation remains
unchanged.
D If the plane of rotation appears to change, DO NOT adjust the tube. Wait 30 minutes and
repeat the POR check.
D If the second check also shows a change in POR, adjust the tube to bring it into
specification, and check the X–Ray beam to Detector Window and ISO Alignments to make
sure they still meet spec.
D ISO does not effect the detector Radial Alignment.
D You must always finish the tube alignments with ISO.
19. Record the final ISO value on FORM 4879 Chapter 11).

j Check box when complete.

8–16
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/I INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

8–10 CBF (Center Body Filter) and SAG


1. Select |CBF and SAG Align|

AlignmentInstallation
Z–Align
ISO Alignment
CBF and SAG Align
–––
POR Alignment
BOW Alignment
Radial Alignment
S/N Tube Output

Dismiss

2. Move the table out of the detector field of view.


D Make sure nothing obstructs the attenuation of the X–Ray beam to detector window.
3. Select |Take CBF/SAG Scans|
4. Press (Start Scan) when it flashes.
5. Upon completion of the scan, the system calculates and displays the average centroid value for
CBF, collimator movement recommendations, if any, and the SAG value.
6. If the calculated CBF value fails to meet the specification of 373.75 0.2, use the following
procedure to adjust the collimator by the displayed amount:
a. Mount the gauge and its holding fixture to the special mounting bracket of the
collimator.
b. Zero out the gauge.
c. Loosen the four collimator mounting bolts, located in the four slotted holes on the
collimator.
d. Adjust the 3/4 inch bolt, located at the top of the collimator, to move the collimator
up or down by the specified distance.
D Turn the bolt clockwise to move the collimator down.
D Turn the bolt counterclockwise to move the collimator up.
e. Tighten the collimator bolts, and torque the four lock bolts to 10 1.0 ft.lbs. (120
+12 in.lbs.).
7. Wait 5 minutes between exposures.
8. Repeat the CBF scans, and collimator adjustment, until CBF falls within the 373.75 0.2CH
specification.
9. Verify SAG meets the CBF peak–to–peak channel difference of <1.1 channels
Remove the gauge and holding fixture from the Gantry.

j Check box when complete.


Section 9 Complete

8–17
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/I INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

APPENDIX 8A RADIAL ALIGNMENT

Radial Alignment (Cold Tube)


Note: You do not have to check Radial alignment when you replace the tube.

1. Roughly adjust the ISO Alignment before you check radial alignment.
2. Use the Isocenter procedure, on page 8–15, to move the tube within 0.005I of the correct position
(the average ISO value of the large and small focal spot).
D Don’t try to attain an ISO Alignment value of 373.75  0.02 channels, at this time. Proceed
to the Radial Alignment as soon as ISO falls within 0.005” of the specified range.
3. Select |Radial Alignment|

AlignmentInstallation

Z–Align
ISO Alignment
CBF and SAG Align
–––
POR Alignment
BOW Alignment
Radial Alignment
S/N Tube Output

Dismiss

4. Remove any objects from the Detector Field of view.


5. Select |Take Air Scan|
6. Press (Start Scan) when it flashes.

8–18
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/I INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Tool Placement and Scan


1. Select |Position the Tube|, and type/enter the value of 180_.
2. After the tube reaches the 180_ position:
a. Turn OFF the axial enable switch.
b. Turn OFF the Gantry HVDC (550) enable switch.
3. Open the front gantry cover; leave it open for the rest of the radial alignment test.
4. Refer to Illustration A–1. Install the rotational alignment tools on the detector.
a. The pin must project into the X–Ray beam.
b. Place the tool which contains the pin on the detector, but do not tighten its holding
screw.
c. Position the other tool over the pin, and insert the opposite end into the locating
holes on the detector, and finger tighten the holding screws.
d. Make sure the tube remains in the 180_ position.
e. Turn ON the gantry HVDC (550) enable switch. (You can leave the axial enable
switch in the OFF position for this test.)
ILLUSTRATION A–1
RADIAL ALIGNMENT TOOL

5. Select |Take Tool Scan|


6. When the scan completes, the system automatically calculates and displays the average centroid
value, and recommended distance to rotate the detector.
D If the displayed value falls within 376.4 0.2 channels, proceed to the final ISO Alignments.
D If the value falls outside the specification, proceed to the adjustments.

8–19
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/I INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Adjustment
Rotate the detector if the displayed value falls outside the 376.4 0.2 channel specification.
1. Refer to Illustration A–2. Use the rotational adjustment hardware to install a dial indicator on the
side of the detector.
2. Set the dial indicator to 0.000I.
ILLUSTRATION A–2
ROTATIONAL HARDWARE

ROTATIONAL
ADJUSTMENT
LOCKING
SCREW

ROTATIONAL
ADJUSTMENT
DETECTOR HEX
MOUNTING
NUT

ROTATIONAL
ADJUSTMENT
LOCKING
DIAL SCREW
INDICATOR

ct 2830

3. Refer to Illustration A–3, on page 8–21.


a. Loosen all three sets of the large detector mounting nuts slightly, until they feel
finger tight.
b. Loosen the allen head rotational adjustment locking screws.
4. Refer to the Average Centroid value display, and use the adjustment cam to rotate the detector in
the specified distance and direction.
5. After you complete the adjustment:
a. Tighten the allen head rotational adjustment locking screws.
b. Torque the inside detector mounting nuts to 25 ft–lbs.
c. Hold the inside nut to keep it from turning, while you torque the outside nuts to 25
ft–lbs.
6. Repeat the radial alignment procedure, to verify the adjustment.
7. Select |Take Tool Scan|
8. Record the actual Average Centroid value measurement on FORM 4879 (Chapter 11).

j Check box when complete.

8–20
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/I INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION A–3
MOUNTING/ADJUSTMENT HARDWARE (DETAIL)
BOW ADJUSTMENT
LOCK NUT

ALLEN HEAD
ROTATIONAL ROTATIONAL
ADJUSTMENT LOCKING
BOW DETECTOR CAM SCREW
ADJUSTMENT MOUNTING
NUTS
ALLEN HEAD
ROTATIONAL
ADJUSTMENT
ALLEN HEAD ALLEN HEAD SCREW

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
ROTATIONAL ROTATIONAL
ADJUSTMENT LOCKING

ÍÍÍ
ÈÈÈ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÈÈÈÈ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
SCREW SCREW
DETECTOR

ÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈ
MOUNTING
NUTS

ROTATIONAL
ADJUSTMENT
CAM
ALLEN HEAD
ROTATIONAL
LOCKING
SCREW

ct2775

8–21
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/I INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

APPENDIX 8B SIGNAL/NOISE OUTPUT

1. Select |S/N Tube Output|

AlignmentInstallation
Z–Align
ISO Alignment
CBF and SAG Align
–––
POR Alignment
BOW Alignment
Radial Alignment
S/N Tube Output

Dismiss

2. Select |Take Scan|


3. Press (Start Scan) when it flashes.
4. Verify that “test passed” appears on the screen.

8–22
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

CHAPTER 9 – GENERATOR CALIBRATION

Usage Note: CT Manufacturing constantly updates this


manual to match product improvements. Use the Installation
book that arrives with the system to install it. Any other
revisions of this manual may not exactly match this system
installation. Use other revisions of this Installation manual for
reference purposes only.

CHAPTER 9 CONTENTS
9–1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–2
9–2 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–3
9–3 mA Meter Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
9–4 New Tube Seed Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–6
9–5 kV Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–7
9–6 Auto mA Cal/X–Ray On Light Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–9
9–7 Site Ground Leakage Current Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–10
Appendix 9A tubeUsage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–12
Appendix 9B Tube Heat Soak & Seasoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–13
Appendix 9C Calibrate HV Tank Feedback Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–16
Measure Total KV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–19
Verify KV Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–19
Create KV Test Baseline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–20
Appendix 9D Auto mA Cal/X–Ray On Light Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–21
Verify mA and kV Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–22
Rise and Fall Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–23
Verify Internal Scan Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–26
Appendix 9E Verify mA Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–27

9–1
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

9–1 Introduction

Follow this procedure to check HV Generation Sub–system, including the Anode and Cathode HV
Tanks, the Tube, and the mA and kV control boards. The flowchart in Illustration 9–2 provides a
graphic overview of the HV Generation subsystem test.
ILLUSTRATION 9–2
CHAPTER FLOWCHART

Start

mA Meter Check
New Tube Seed Shift*
* skip if system tape provided

No
Does kV Test
Baseline
Exist?

Yes

Fail
KV Test

Pass
Appendix C
Calibration of HV Tank Feedback Resistors
Total kV Measurement
Create kV Baseline

Auto mA Cal
X–Ray ON Light Checks

Appendix D
Auto mA Cal
X–Ray ON Light Checks
Rise & Fall Time
Verify Internal Scan Timer

Site Ground Leakage Current Check

End

9–2
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

9–2 Required Tools


D System Software
D DVM
D Bleeder
D Scope Probe–to–bleeder Cable 46–219921G1 (If available) to minimize ripple
on bleeder waveform
–or–
D Use 30 feet of Belden #8422 cable (stock code 06762)
D 6 Feet Ground Wire (AWG12 MINIMUM)
D Scope
D GND Wrist Strap
D Spanner Wrench
D Torque Wrench
D Spanner Adapter
D Torque Wrench Adapter
D 1/2 Socket
D HV Divider–to–scope Test Cable
D (2) 10i High Voltage Cables, 3 Wire
D KVp Evaluation Tool, PN 2108232, located in an envelope attached to the
outside of the Software Collector Box.
IMPORTANT:
D YOU MUST RECORD THE DATA COLLECTED IN THIS CHAPTER ON FORM
F4879, LOCATED IN CHAPTER 11 OF THIS BOOK.
D LOCATE THE HHS DATA, SENT FROM THE FACTORY, IN THE SOFTWARE
COLLECTOR BOX. RETAIN THIS DATA WITH THE HHS DATA COLLECTED
AT THE SITE.

9–3
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

9–3 mA Meter Check


1. Select |SERVICE|

Service
2. Select |SYSTEM INTEGRATION|







3. Select |GENERATOR CALIBRATION|

COMPUTER INTEGRATION
TABLE/GANTRY INTEGRATION
GENERATOR CALIBRATION
DAS INTEGRATION
ALIGNMENTS
SYSTEM TESTS

4. Select |START|

. . . START. . .

9–4
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

5. Select |mA Meter Check|

Generator Installation and Verification


mA Meter Check
kV Test
Auto mA Cal
HHS Scans
HHS Report
Ground Leakage Test
Heat Soak & Seasoning
––––
New Tube Seed Shift
Bleeder Setup (DDC)
Rise and Fall Time (DDC)

Internal Scan Time (DDC)


Heat Soak & Seasoning (Diag)

Dismiss

6. Select |Accept| to begin the test, after the time delay expires.
D Once the test begins, the software enables the meter circuit for 4 seconds.
D Record the displayed Cathode and Anode mA values on FORM 4879, in the “Circuit ON”
section of the kV Meter Verification table.
D The “Circuit ON” values of the cathode and anode sides should read approximately 15 – 25
mA.
7. Select |Dismiss|

j Check box when complete.

9–5
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

9–4 New Tube Seed Shift

Note: If a system state MOD arrived with the gantry, skip the New Tube Seed Shift
calibration.

Use the following sequence to run a partial Install New Tube, and set the calseed values on a new
system.
1. Select |New Tube Seed Shift|

Generator Installation and Verification


mA Meter Check
kV Test
Auto mA Cal
HHS Scans
HHS Report
Ground Leakage Test
Heat Soak & Seasoning
––––
New Tube Seed Shift
Bleeder Setup (DDC)
Rise and Fall Time (DDC)

Internal Scan Time (DDC)


Heat Soak & Seasoning (Diag)

Dismiss

2. The screen prompts you to confirm the displayed tube type.


3. Verify the installed and configured tube types match.
4. Press (Start Scan) when it illuminates, to automatically run the filament current seed shift
program.
D ABORT the program after the filament current seed shift scans, and before ductility
warm–up

j Check box when complete.

9–6
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

9–5 kV Test

KV Test is a procedure that will verify if your kV values are still within specification since the last
calibration of the X–Ray Subsystem. A KV Test Baseline scan is required to take advantage of this
feature. Locate the KVp tool in the software collector box.
1. Select |KV Test|

Generator Installation and Verification


mA Meter Check
kV Test
Auto mA Cal
HHS Scans
HHS Report
Ground Leakage Test
Heat Soak & Seasoning
––––
New Tube Seed Shift
Bleeder Setup (DDC)
Rise and Fall Time (DDC)

Internal Scan Time (DDC)


Heat Soak & Seasoning (Diag)

Dismiss

2. Select |View Data|


3. Verify whether or not a kV baseline exists.
a. If the Baseline values on the screen equal 0, then no baseline data exists,
and you have to run the calibrations and tests in appendices 9C , page 9–16
and 9D , page 9–21. When you complete these Appendixes, proceed to
Auto mA Cal/X–Ray On Light Check, on page 9–9.
b. If the Baseline values on the screen contain data, proceed to Step 4.
4. Select |Position Tube at Top|
5. Turn OFF the axial drive switch, and remove the mylar window from the gantry.
6. Select |kV Test|
7. Select |Air Scan|
8. Press the (Start Scan) when it lights
D The system acquires four air scans.
9. Place the kVp Evaluation Tool, PN 2108232, on the detector window.
D Refer to Illustration 9–3 for a guide to Evaluation Tool placement.

9–7
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

10. Select |Metal Scan|


11. Press (Start Scan) when the button lights
D The system acquires air scans.
12. Remove the KVp Evaluation Tool from the gantry.

CAUTION When the |DISMISS| softkey is selected the gantry will park at the
2 o’clock position. Be sure to remove your KV Tool before selecting this
softkey, otherwise your KV Tool may be damaged or lost in the gantry.

13. The screen displays pass/fail results:


D If the kV Test passes, select |File/Exit|, and proceed to Auto mA Cal.
D If the kV Test fails, follow the instructions in Appendix 9C and 9D to calibrate and test the
system. (Appendix 9C starts on page 9–16.) Then, proceed to the Auto mA Cal/X–Ray On
Light Check, on page 9–9.
ILLUSTRATION 9–3
KVP EVALUATION TOOL PLACEMENT
Tool Placement

Detector Detector Center


Window Hex Screw

Detector kVp Tool

Place the kV Test Tool on the detector window, with the print side up. Position the tool over the
center of the detector, 1/2 inch. Align the crosshair on the tool with the center detector Hex Screw
(5th from either visible side).

9–8
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

9–6 Auto mA Cal/X–Ray On Light Check

Use this procedure to verify and complete Auto mA Cal on the system.
If you have just run a Heat Soak and Seasoning, wait 30 minutes
before you run the Auto mA Cal.

Note: The system automatically warms up the tube.

1. Select |Auto mA Cal|

Generator Installation and Verification


mA Meter Check
kV Test
Auto mA Cal
HHS Scans
HHS Report
Ground Leakage Test
Heat Soak & Seasoning
––––
New Tube Seed Shift
Bleeder Setup (DDC)
Rise and Fall Time (DDC)
Internal Scan Time (DDC)
Heat Soak & Seasoning (Diag)

Dismiss

2. Press (Start Scan) when it flashes.


3. During this test, verify the X–Ray on indicators, located on the gantry display and the rear gantry
shroud, illuminate when X–Ray is on.
4. Record data on FORM 4879. (Chapter 11)

Note: If the system cannot complete the Auto mA Cal because HV aborts, run the scan
protocol, located on page 10–28 titled Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning. Place a 48cm
phantom in the X–Ray beam, to protect the detector from radiation damage during this
procedure. Do not worry about the image quality of the scans reconstructed during
the, Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning.

If this heat soak and seasoning does not correct the HV aborts, follow the Heat Soak
and Seasoning procedure in Appendix 9B , on page 9–13.

j Check box when complete.

9–9
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

9–7 Site Ground Leakage Current Checks

CAUTION Turn OFF, tag and lock the wall power.

Use an ECOS1023H, or equivalent device, to measure the ground leakage current present in the
main system ground wire that connects the PDU cabinet to the wall ground. If the system has an 80
kVA isolation transformer, measure the ground leakage current in the ground wire that connects the
80 kVA isolation transformer to the wall ground.

CAUTION TURN OFF, TAG, AND LOCK WALL POWER. BEFORE YOU DISCONNECT
THE MAIN SYSTEM GROUND, TO INSTALL (OR REMOVE) THE ECOS1023H,
TEMPORARILY INSTALL A GROUND JUMPER FROM THE WALL GROUND TO
THE PDU (OR 80 KVA ISOLATION TRANSFORMER, IF PRESENT). NEVER
ALLOW THE SYSTEM TO FLOAT, EVEN WITH THE POWER OFF.

1. Install the ECOS1023H in series with the main ground wire.


2. Remove the temporary ground jumper (see Caution, above) before you turn on the wall power.
3. Select |Ground Leakage Test|

Generator Installation and Verification


mA Meter Check
kV Test
Auto mA Cal
HHS Scans
HHS Report
Ground Leakage Test
Heat Soak & Seasoning
––––
New Tube Seed Shift
Bleeder Setup (DDC)
Rise and Fall Time (DDC)

Internal Scan Time (DDC)


Heat Soak & Seasoning (Diag)

Dismiss

4. Select |Tube Warm–up|


5. Select |Ground Leakage Test|

9–10
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

6. Verify/Set–up the following DDC parameters:


D STATIC X–RAY ON
D 4 SECOND SCAN
D 1 SCAN
D 2 SECOND ISD
D 120 kV
D 400 mA
D 1:1 COMPRESSION FACTOR
D CALIBRATION VECTOR NONE
D LARGE FOV
D 0 mm APERTURE
D BODY FILTER
D SPOT SIZE LARGE
D OFFSET CORRECT
7. Select |Accept Rx|
8. Make sure the ground current leakage, measured by the ECOS1023H, remains less than 5mA
during the scan.
9. Turn OFF, tag and lock wall power.
10. Install the temporary ground jumper. (See the Caution statement at the beginning of this
procedure)
11. Remove the ECOS1023H.
12. Remove the temporary ground jumper.
SITE GROUND LEAKAGE CURRENT EQUALS <5 MILLIAMPS

j Check box when complete.


Chapter 9 Complete

9–11
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

APPENDIX 9A TUBEUSAGE

tubeUsage
Use the tubeUsage tool to display a list of currently viewable tube usage files.
The system stores these files when you save the mechanical characterization.
1. Display the Service Desktop
2. Select |Trouble Shoot|
3. Select |X–Ray Generation|
4. Select |Tube Usage| to display the tube usage statistics

9–12
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

APPENDIX 9B TUBE HEAT SOAK AND SEASONING

Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning


Run on every new tube. You may also have to run this on a tube that causes scan aborts or
image streaks.
1. Select |Heat Soak & Seasoning|

Generator Installation and Verification


mA Meter Check
kV Test
Auto mA Cal
HHS Scans
HHS Report
Ground Leakage Test
Heat Soak & Seasoning
––––
New Tube Seed Shift
Bleeder Setup (DDC)
Rise and Fall Time (DDC)

Internal Scan Time (DDC)


Heat Soak & Seasoning (Diags)

Dismiss

2. Select |Warmup & HHS)| (Heat Soak and Seasoning

Note: Pass/Fail Criteria of the Heat Soak And Seasoning procedure:

The MX165 and MX200 tubes have different pass/fail criteria for high voltage errors.

Use criteria A, section 9–8 on page 9–14 for the MX165 tube.

Use criteria B, section 9–9 on page 9–14 for the MX200 tube.

To determine tube type either look at the ICD cards or from the Service Desktop
select: Utilities, Tube Display, Start.

3. Select |FILE/EXIT| when complete.

j Check box when complete.

9–13
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

9–8 MX165 Pass/Fail Criteria

When you run Tube Heat Soak and Stability, monitor the error log for high voltage overcurrents,
shoot–throughs and spits. If you encounter errors during the seasoning steps, immediately stop the
series, and step back to the next lower KV seasoning cal series. Return to the failing station, and
scan until error free. If the errors continue, repeat the process up to four times before you pull the
tube.

Upon completion of the high voltage stability test, re–torque the locking ring on each H.V. cable (at
the tube) to 7+1 ft. lbs. or 84 +12 in. lbs. Also, tape paper towels around tube locking rings, to
absorb excess oil. Remove the paper towels after several rotations of the gantry.

9–9 MX200 Pass/Fail Criteria

1. If at any time during this procedure there is a scan abort which is due to the tube (i.e max spit rate
exceeded, anode overcurrent .......) the operator shall try to resume the test. If before completing
this procedure there are more than three scan aborts then the test fails and the tube should be
replaced.

2. During the seasoning steps the spit count for each scan shall be monitored and if:
– the spit count of either of the last two scans of each group exceeds 5 then repeat that group
– the spit count of either of the last two scans of each group exceeds 10 then backup to the
previous group and restart
– if after 3 attempts to complete any scan group you are unsuccessful then the tube should
be replaced.

See Flow Chart, section 9–10, page 9–15.

9–14
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

9–10 MX200 Pass/Fail Criteria Flowchart

Start Heat Soak & Season

RUN
Heat Input
Anode Soak 1 RESUME
Anode Soak 1 Scanning
Casing Soak
n
y y
Scan Abort Scan Aborts A
>3
n

Seasoning Scan Group

Previous Seasoning Scan Previous Seasoning Scan


n
y y
Scan Abort Scan Aborts A
>3
y n
y
Retries
<3 Spits / Scan
>10
Replace
A n n A Tube
y
y Retries Spits / Scan
<3 >5
n
A n
n
Increment to Last
Next Scan Group Group
y

Done

9–15
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

APPENDIX 9C CALIBRATE HV TANK FEEDBACK RESISTORS

Install HV Divider
1. Switch off “X–Ray and Drives” power on the gantry.
2. Inside the Gantry:
a. Switch OFF the HVDC (550) enable.
b. Switch OFF the axial drive.
c. Rotate the Tube to the 3 o’clock position
d. Pin the Gantry.
e. Switch OFF the 120vac Gantry power.
f. Refer to Illustration C–1. Install the HV Divider between Tube and Tanks.

Note: Place the HV Divider on a table or tube hoist, so the cables reach the tube.

3. Refer to Illustration C–1. Add a ground wire (minimum size of AWG 12) from Tube ground to
Bleeder ground.
4. Switch ON the 120vac Gantry power.
5. Switch ON the HVDC (550) enable.
6. Switch ON “X–Ray and Drives” power on the gantry.
7. Reset the hardware.
ILLUSTRATION C–1
BLEEDER INSTALLATION
GROUND WIRE

CATHODE
GRN CABLE TO
GANTRY

CATHODE

  

10” H.V. 
CABLES

ANODE
C1515A
DIVIDER
ANODE
CABLE TO
GANTRY

TUBE

9–16
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Calibrate HV Tank Feedback Resistors


Setup Instrumentation
Use an oscilloscope* with 10X probes:
1. Connect channel one to the anode output of the divider.
D Connect the scope ground to bleeder ground.
2. Connect channel two to the cathode output of the divider.
D Connect the scope ground to bleeder ground.

Note: In order to minimize bleeder–induced ripple on the KV waveform, connect a 30 foot


Belden shielded twisted pair cable between the scope probes and the bleeder. Refer
to the Required Tools list, on page 9–3, for a more complete description of this cable.

3. Trigger channel one, positive, DC couple, trigger mode normal.


4. Channel one and two, 10v/div, time base 200ms.
5. Invert Channel two.
*If possible, try to plug the scope into the table 120vac outlet, to reduce the noise on the scope
waveforms. Use an extension cord if necessary.

Note: Determine the type of kV board in the OBC.


This procedure lists the names of components on the 46–321064G1–D kV board
without brackets.
This procedure lists the names of components on the 46–321198G1 kV board in
[brackets].

Calibrate the Cathode


1. Display the Generator Installation and Verification menu.
2. Select |Bleeder Setup| (DDC).
3. Verify/Set–up the following DDC parameters:
D STATIC X–RAY ON
D 1 SECOND
D 1 SCAN
D FOCAL SPOT LARGE
D 100 KV
D 50 MA
D MONITOR ENABLE
4. Select |ACCEPT RX|
The Computer Displayed reading spec for the Cathode kV and Anode kV
equals 50 0.5 kV.

Note: If you use scope cursors to window the trace, position the Left Vertical Cursor to the
Right of the Rising Edge of the waveform. Position the Right Vertical Cursor to the
Left of the Falling Edge of the Waveform.

9–17
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

5. Adjust the Cathode pot on the kV board, until the scope reading for the Cathode kV, and the
displayed reading for the Cathode kV in the message log, fall within 0.5kV of each other.
6. Use the pot, labeled CA [CAKV, R316], on the kV board,
to adjust the scope reading.
D CCW decreases the scope kV.
D CW increases the scope kV.
D 1/2 turn equals approximately 0.5 kV.
7. Record the results on FORM 4879.
Calibrate the Anode
1. Display the Generator Installation and Verification menu.
2. Select |Bleeder Setup| (DDC).
3. Verify/Set–up the following DDC parameters:
D STATIC X–RAY ON
D 1 SECOND
D 1 SCAN
D FOCAL SPOT LARGE
D 100 KV
D 50 MA
D MONITOR ENABLE
4. Select |ACCEPT RX|
The Computer Displayed reading spec for the Cathode kV and Anode kV
equals 50 0.5 kV.

Note: If you use scope cursors to window the trace, position the Left Vertical Cursor to the
Right of the Rising Edge of the waveform. Position the Right Vertical Cursor to the
Left of the Falling Edge of the Waveform.

5. Adjust the Anode pot on the kV board, until the scope reading for the Anode kV, and the
displayed reading for the Anode kV in the message log, fall within 0.5kV of each other.
6. Use the pot, labeled AN [ANKV, R318], on the kV board,
to adjust the scope reading.
D CCW decreases the scope kV.
D CW increases the scope kV
D 1/2 turn is approximately 0.5 kV.
7. Record the results on FORM 4879.

j Check box when complete.

9–18
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Measure Total kV
1. Display the Generator Installation and Verification menu.
2. Select |Bleeder Setup| (DDC).
3. Verify/Set–up the following DDC parameters:
D STATIC X–RAY ON
D 1 SECOND
D 1 SCAN
D FOCAL SPOT LARGE
D 100 KV
D 50 MA
D MONITOR ENABLE
4. Change the oscilloscope to add ch.1 and ch.2, to read
total kV from the HV divider.
5. Channel one and two, 20v/div, time base 200ms, trigger ch. one, positive.
6. Select |ACCEPT RX|
7. Record the scope reading, and the Avg. kV displayed in the message log,
in FORM 4879.
8. Display the Generator Characterization menu.
9. Toggle the softkey Monitor Enable OFF, so the message log no longer displays kV and mA
readings.

j Check box when complete.

Verify kV Meter
Use this procedure to verify the calibration of the internal kV metering circuits.
1. Display the Generator Installation and Verification menu.
2. Select |mA Meter Check|
3. Select |Accept|
D The test begins after the time delay expires.
D Once the test begins, the software enables the meter circuit for 4 seconds.
4. Record the displayed Anode kV, Cathode kV and Total kV values in the FORM 4879 “Circuit
OFF” and “Circuit ON” table.
5. Select |Dismiss|

j Check box when complete.


6. Remove the external HV Divider and restore the normal system connections.
7. Make sure you ty–wrapped the High Voltage cables into place.
8. Wrap paper towels around tube locking rings to absorb excess oil.
9. Restore the OBC cover (to retain OBC boards during rotation.)

9–19
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Create KV Test Baseline


To save time on future tube change, create a kV Test Baseline on the freshly calibrated system.
1. Display the Generator Installation and Verification menu
2. Select |kV Test|.
3. Select |Tube at Top|
4. Turn OFF the axial drive switch.
5. Remove the mylar window from the gantry.
6. Select |Create Baseline|
D The system acquires four air scans.
7. Place the kVp Evaluation Tool, PN 2108232, on the detector window.
D Refer to Illustration C–2 for a guide to Evaluation Tool placement.
8. Select |Continue|
D The system acquires four kV scans.
9. Remove the KVp Evaluation tool from the gantry.

CAUTION When the |DISMISS| softkey is selected the gantry will park at the
2 o’clock position. Be sure to remove your KV Tool before selecting this
softkey, otherwise your KV Tool may be damaged or lost in the gantry.

Upon completion, the system saves the kV Baseline with the system characterization values on the
system state MOD.
ILLUSTRATION C–2
KVP EVALUATION TOOL PLACEMENT
Tool Placement

Detector Detector Center


Window Hex Screw

Detector kVp Tool

Place the kV Test Tool on the detector window, with the print side up. Position the tool over the
center of the detector, 1/2 inch. Align the crosshair on the tool with the center detector Hex Screw
(5th from either visible side).

9–20
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

APPENDIX 9D VERIFY MA AND KV

Auto mA Cal/X–Ray On Light Check


Use this procedure to verify and complete Auto mA Cal on the system. If you have just run a Heat
Soak and Seasoning, wait 30 minutes before you run the Auto mA Cal.

Note: The system automatically warms up the tube.

1. Select |Auto mA Cal|

Generator Installation and Verification


mA Meter Check
kV Test
Auto mA Cal
HHS Scans
HHS Report
Ground Leakage Test
Heat Soak & Seasoning
––––
New Tube Seed Shift
Bleeder Setup (DDC)
Rise and Fall Time (DDC)

Internal Scan Time (DDC)


Heat Soak & Seasoning (Diag)

Dismiss

2. Press (Start Scan) when it flashes.


D The program automatically runs Ductility and Auto mA Cal.
3. During this test, verify the X–Ray on indicators, located on the gantry display and the rear gantry
shroud, illuminate when X–Ray is on.
4. Record data on FORM 4879. (Chapter 11)

Note: If the system cannot complete the Auto mA Cal because HV aborts, run the scan
protocol, located on page 10–28 titled Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning. Place a 48cm
phantom in the X–Ray beam, to protect the detector from radiation damage during this
procedure. Do not worry about the image quality of the scans reconstructed during
the, Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning.

If this heat soak and seasoning does not correct the HV aborts, follow the Heat Soak
and Seasoning procedure in Appendix 9B , on page 9–13.

j Check box when complete.

9–21
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Verify mA and kV
Use this procedure to verify the system currently meets kV and mA accuracies over the range of
selectable technics.
1. Select |HHS Scans|

Generator Installation and Verification


mA Meter Check
kV Test
Auto mA Cal
HHS Scans
HHS Report
Ground Leakage Test
Heat Soak & Seasoning
––––
New Tube Seed Shift
Bleeder Setup (DDC)
Rise and Fall Time (DDC)

Internal Scan Time (DDC)


Heat Soak & Seasoning (Diag)

Dismiss

2. Press (Start Scan) when it flashes, to initiate the program.

Note: If the system cannot complete the Auto mA Cal because HV aborts, run the scan
protocol, located on page 10–28 titled Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning. Place a 48cm
phantom in the X–Ray beam, to protect the detector from radiation damage during this
procedure. Do not worry about the image quality of the scans reconstructed during
the, Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning.

If this heat soak and seasoning does not correct the HV aborts, follow the Heat Soak
and Seasoning procedure in Appendix 9B , on page 9–13.

3. Record the Computer displayed kV and mA at 5ms, Anode kV, Cathode mA, Cathode kV and
Total kV in the corresponding Tables in FORM 4879 for the Large and Small focal spots.
D You may use a signed/dated hard copy printout in place of recording the data on FORM
4879.
D The system also displays other non–HHS reportable kV/mA/scan time data on the plasma,
as a part of a quality check. Any data accompanied by an asterisk* is out of spec, and has
to be fixed.

j Check box when complete.

9–22
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Rise and Fall Time


Note: Determine the type of kV board in the OBC.
This procedure lists the names of components on the 46–321064G1–D kV board
without brackets.
This procedure lists the names of components on the 46–321198G1 kV board in
[brackets].

1. In the OBC, connect a scope to the KV board.


D Channel 1: Exposure Command EXCM, TP22 [TP5].
Scope ground to LGND, TP6 [TP3].
2v/div
D Channel 2: Total kV KVTB, TP30 [TP11].
(At this test point KV = 20KV per volt.)
Scope ground to AGND TP39 [SGND, TP12].
1v/div
2. Set the Scope Time base to 200 usec.
D Positive or Negative trigger as required.
3. Select |Rise and Fall Time| (DDC)

Generator Installation and Verification


mA Meter Check
kV Test
Auto mA Cal
HHS Scans
HHS Report
Ground Leakage Test
Heat Soak & Seasoning
––––
New Tube Seed Shift
Bleeder Setup (DDC)
Rise and Fall Time (DDC)

Internal Scan Time (DDC)


Heat Soak & Seasoning (Diag)

Dismiss

9–23
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Measure Rise Time


1. Verify/Set–up the following DDC parameters:
D STATIC X–RAY ON
D 1 SECOND
D FOCAL SPOT LARGE
D 80 KV
D 400 MA

Note: Measure rise time only on the the 80kV/400mA scan.

2. Select |Accept Rx|


3. Select |Pause| after the start of scan, to prevent the scope from displaying the fall time.
4. After you record the rise time, select the |Resume| to initiate the fall time scan.
5. Record the delay between the rise/fall of the EXCM signal, and the 75% threshold crossing of
the selected kV (on FORM 4879).
D Do not include the waveform overshoot.
D The 75% point for 80kV equals 60kV

Note: Refer to Illustration D–1 for measurement clarification.

Measure Fall Time


1. Verify/Set–up the following DDC parameters:
D STATIC X–RAY ON
D 1 SECOND
D FOCAL SPOT LARGE
D 140 KV
D 40 MA

Note: Measure rise time only on the the 140kV/40mA scan.

2. Record the delay between the rise/fall of the EXCM signal, and the 75% threshold crossing of
the selected kV (on FORM 4879).
D Do not include the waveform overshoot.
D The 75% point for 140kV equals 105kV

Note: Refer to Illustration D–1 for measurement clarification.

j Check box when complete.

Leave the scope connected for the next test.

9–24
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

ILLUSTRATION D–1
RISE AND FALL TIME MEASUREMENT

RISE TIME

EXAMPLE
80kV/40mA

Ch.1 IGNORE POSSIBLE


TP22 OVERSHOOT
EXCM
[TP5]

RISE
TIME
75% OF
SELECTED
Ch.2 TECHNIC
TP 30
KVTB
[TP11]
0% XRAY

FALL TIME
EXAMPLE
80kV/40mA

Ch.1
TP22
EXCM
[TP5]

100% XRAY

75% OF
SELECTED
FALL
TECHNIC
TIME
Ch.2
TP 30
KVTB
[TP11]

9–25
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Verify Internal Scan Timer


1. Display the Generator Characterization menu.
2. Toggle the softkey Monitor Enable ON, to display the scan time in the message log.
3. Use the same oscilloscope connections to the kV Board as the Rise and Fall Time tests. (See
page 9–23, Step 1.)
4. Set the Scope Time base to 200 msec, positive trigger.
5. Use DDC to take a stationary, 1.0 sec, 0mm, 100kV, 40mA, Large Focal Spot scan.
6. Record the measured scan time from the oscilloscope, and the displayed scan time from the
message log, on Form 4879.
7. Display the Generator Characterization menu.
8. Toggle the softkey Monitor Enable OFF, to stop the scan time
display in the message log.
9. Disconnect the scope from the kV board.
10. Replace the OBC cover.

j Check box when complete.

9–26
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

APPENDIX 9E VERIFY MA METER

Verify mA Meter
Use this procedure to verify the internal mA metering circuitry calibration.
1. Switch OFF the HVDC (550) enable, inside the gantry.
2. Switch OFF the axial drive, inside the gantry.
3. Rotate the Anode tank to the 2 o’clock position.
4. Pin the Gantry
5. Remove the OBC cover (if necessary).
6. Use a DVM as a DC mA meter.
D Set the meter range to one decimal place.
7. Connect the DVM black lead to TP8 (ACAL1) on the mA board.
8. Connect the DVM red lead to TP11 (ACAL2) on the mA board.
ILLUSTRATION E–1
OBC BOARD SLOT ASSIGNMENT
OBC Board Slot Assignments

Collimator

CTVRC

MA Control

KV Control

Gentry I/O

RCOM

Heurikon (CPU)

9–27
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Verify mA Meter
9. Select |mA Meter Check|

Generator Installation and Verification


mA Meter Check
kV Test
Auto mA Cal
HHS Scans
HHS Report
Ground Leakage Test
Heat Soak & Seasoning
––––
New Tube Seed Shift
Bleeder Setup (DDC)
Rise and Fall Time (DDC)

Internal Scan Time (DDC)


Heat Soak & Seasoning (Diag)

Dismiss

10. Select |Accept|


11. Record the displayed and measured Anode mA values in the “Circuit OFF” and “Circuit ON”
table in FORM 4879.
D Acceptable “Circuit ON” values: 140 to 200mA

Note: The cathode side will read approximately 19 mA during “Circuit ON”; anode should
read 140 to 200mA, as stated above.)

j Check box when complete.

9–28
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Verify mA Meter
12. Repeat the test for the Cathode side:
a. Use a DVM as a DC mA meter; set the meter range to one decimal place.
b. Connect the DVM red lead to TP9 (CCAL1) on the mA board.
c. Connect the DVM black lead to TP14 (CCAL2) on the mA board.
13. Select |Accept|
14. Record the displayed and measured Cathode mA values in the “Circuit OFF” and “Circuit ON”
table in FORM 4879.
D Acceptable “Circuit ON” values: 140 to 200mA

Note: The anode side will read approximately 19 mA during “Circuit ON”; cathode should
read 140 to 200mA, as stated above.)

j Check box when complete.


15. Disconnect the test equipment.
16. Switch ON the HVDC (550) enable.

9–29
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

NOTES

9–30
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

CHAPTER 10 – SYSTEM TESTS

Usage Note: CT Manufacturing constantly updates this


manual to match product improvements. Use the Installation
book that arrives with the system to install it. Any other
revisions of this manual may not exactly match this system
installation. Use other revisions of this Installation manual for
reference purposes only.

CHAPTER 10 CONTENTS
10–1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–2
10–2 Calibration Process Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–3
10–2–1 Prepare the QA Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–3
10–2–4 Calibration Process A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–5
10–2–5 Calibration Process B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–6
10–3 How to Scan with Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–7
10–4 Phantom Self Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–9
10–5 How to Analyze N Number Scans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–10
10–6 System Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–13
10–6–1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–13
10–6–2 Table/Gantry Alignment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–13
10–6–3 Tomographic Plane Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–14
10–6–4 System Scanning Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–15
10–7 Image Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–16
10–7–1 Scan Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–16
10–7–2 Data Recording: Means and Standard Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . 10–16
10–7–3 Term Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–17
10–7–4 Image Series for CT/i System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–17
10–7–4–1 Analyze Image Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–18
10–7–5 QA Image Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–19
10–7–5–1 Analyze QA Image Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–20
10–8 (to 10–13) Image Data Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–22
10–14 Save System State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–28
10–15 Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–28
Appendix 10A Exposure Time Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–29
Appendix 10B Streak Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–30
Appendix 10C Teflon Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–31
Appendix 10D Artifact Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–35
Appendix 10E Q–Cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–43
Appendix 10F Calibrate Crosstalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–46
Appendix 10G Generate Alpha Vector Cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–47
Appendix 10H Measure Artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–48
Appendix 10I Image Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–49
Appendix 10J Scan GE Performance Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–50

10–1
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

APPENDIX 1N

10–1 Introduction

This chapter contains descriptions of the Calibration Procedure, Initial Tests, System Functional
tests and the Image Series which you run before you turn the system over to the customer. The
Image Series sections instruct you to scan system phantoms, record the means and standard
deviations, and evaluate the image quality of the resulting images.
ILLUSTRATION 10–1
SYSTEM TEST OVERVIEW

Start

Process B
Q–Cal
Did you load No Cross–talk
Calibrations? Alpha Vector

Yes
1 Air Cal
All Air Cals

Align
Phantoms
Align
Phantoms

Phantom Cal

N #s
T/G Alignment
TPI
Functional Tests
Image Series
Save System State
Protocol Heat Soak & Seasoning

End

10–2
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

10–2 Calibration Process

10–2–1 Prepare the QA Phantom


1. Fill the Quality Assurance (QA) phantom with distilled water.
2. Locate the multi–language sticker packet in the QA phantom shipping box.
3. Attach the sticker with the customer’s language to the face of the phantom hanger
bracket.

10–2–2 Calibration Process Introduction

If your system has a factory supplied state MOD, you should have loaded the system calibration files
during the Restore System State, section 5–11, on page 5–16 of this manual.
D To determine whether or not the system contains calibration files.

10–2–3 Check for the Presence of Cal Files


1. Select |SERVICE|

Service
2. Select |UTILITIES|

UTILITIES

3. Select |CAL ANALYSIS|

EDITOR
CALCULATOR
CALENDAR
SHELL

TUBE DISPLAY
CAL ANALYSIS
SCAN ANALYSIS
DD FILE
IMAGE ANALYSIS
INSTALL OPTIONS
VERIFY OPTIONS
VERIFY SECURITY

APPLICATIONS SHUTDOWN

10–3
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

4. Select |START| to open the Cal List/Select window.

. . . START. . .
D IF a Cal list appears (as shown below), the factory supplied Calibration files
were loaded during the Chapter 5 procedures, you may proceed to section
10–2–4.
–or–
D IF the system does NOT display a list of calibrations, proceed directly to
section 10–2–5.
ILLUSTRATION 10–2
CAL LIST/SELECT EXAMPLE

cal_LS
Select Set Sort
Group Mode
Group V KV Thick Phantom Spot Filter Date/Time
Module
XTALK Y *** ***** ****** *** Wed Oct 4 20:44:29 1995 Valid
Afterglow Y *** ***** *** **** *** Thur Oct 5 14:18:57 1995 Save
Q Cal Y 80 1 ***** Small ***** Wed Oct 4 20:29:05 1995
Module
Cold Q Cal N 80 1 ***** Small *** Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995 Save
Vector
Air Y 80 1 ***** Small Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995
Water BH Y 80 1 ******** Small Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995
Show
Vector
Poly BH Y 80 1 ******** Small Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995
Save
Air Cal Scal Y 80 1 ******** Small Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995 Full DB
This is a generic representation
Q Cal Y 80 3 ***** Small ***** Wed Oct 4 20:29:05 1995 Restore
of a cal list. Your system may
Air Y 80 3 ***** Small Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995 Full DB
appear sightly different.
Cold Q Cal N 80 3 ***** Small *** Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995
Air Y 80 3 ***** Small Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995
Air Y 80 3 ***** Small 5 Mon Nov 29 16:29:59 1995
Water BH Y 80 3 ******** Small 5 Mon Nov 29 16:29:59 1995
Poly BH Y 80 3 ******** Small 5 Mon Nov 29 16:29:59 1995
Medium Mis Y 80 3 ******** Small Body Thur Nov 27 16:29:59 1995
A Cal Scal Y 80 3 ******** Small Body Mon Nov 27 16:29:59 1995
A Cal Scal Y 80 3 ******** Small Body Mon Nov 29 10:28:53 1995
Q Cal Y 80 3 ***** Small ***** Wed Oct 4 20:29:05 1995
Cold Q Cal N 80 5 ***** Small *** Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995
Air Y 80 5 ***** Small Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995

10–4
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

10–2–4 Calibration Process A

1. Select to warm up the tube.

Daily Prep

2. Select

Scanner Utilities

3. Select Detailed Calibration from the Scanner Utilities Menu.

4. Refer to Illustration 10–3. Select the following screen parameters:


a. Calibration Type: AIR
b. KV: Select all kV settings.
c. Aperture: 1mm, 3mm, 5mm, 7mm, 10mm.

Note: Do NOT select aperture “scaled”

ILLUSTRATION 10–3
DETAILED CALIBRATION SCREEN

Detailed Calibration

Calibration Small Large Adjust CT


Type Air SFOV SFOV Number...

KV 80KV 100KV 120KV 140KV

Aperture Scaled 1mm 3mm 5mm 7mm 10mm

5. Run the selected Air Calibrations.


6. When the calibration process completes, continue to the Phantom Self Calibration
procedure, Section 10–4.

10–5
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

10–2–5 Calibration Process B


Follow this calibration process when the system arrives from the factory without a set of calibration
files.
1. Q–Cals, use appendix 10E for reference, if required.
2. Cross–talk calibration, use appendix 10F for reference, if required.
3. Alpha Vector calibration, use appendix 10G for reference, if required.
4. Use the user select option, (NOT Scaled), to acquire 1 Air Cal at 120kV/1mm/large focal
spot,
5. Use a bubble level and the Z–axis knob on the phantom holder to level the phantom.
6. Refer to Illustration 10–4. Acquire Air and Phantom Calibrations, with the following
parameters:
a. Calibration Type: AIR, Small FOV, Large FOV
b. KV: Select all kV settings.
c. Aperture: Scaled (equivalent to the RP SmartCal)
ILLUSTRATION 10–4
DETAILED CALIBRATION SCREEN

Detailed Calibration

Calibration Small Large Adjust CT


Type Air SFOV SFOV Number...

KV 80KV 100KV 120KV 140KV

Aperture Scaled 1mm 3mm 5mm 7mm 10mm

7. When the calibration process completes, continue to the Phantom Self Calibration
procedure, Section 10–4.

10–6
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

10–3 How to Scan with Protocols

Locate the Manufacturing and Installation protocols under Infant area 20.

1. Select

New Patient

2. Enter Patient ID
3. Click left on the ‘‘Infant” anatomical figure icon.

4. Click left on the area below the infant’s feet (inside circle)

5. Select a protocol from the list, to display the corresponding view edit screen.
D Optional Method: Enter the Protocol Number into the Protocol Number Field on the Exam Rx
Screen.

10–7
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Note: This Protocol list is being shared by manufacturing and service. It is also being used for
different product option offerings. You must follow the instruction carefully in the
scanning section and verify the proper technic has been shot before filling out the data
sheet. Otherwise you may troubleshoot an image problem that only exists because the
wrong technic was shot.

ILLUSTRATION 10–5
PROTOCOL LIST (EXAMPLE)

20.1

20.2

20.3

20.4

20.5

20.6

20.7

20.8 System Scan/Cust Qual Reli

20.9

20.10

20.11

20.12

20.13

20.14

10–8
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

10–4 Phantom Self Calibration

Run the small and large phantom self calibrations before you acquire the Image Series, or any time
you doubt the N# values. The self calibration procedure modifies 48cm poly phantom and 20cm
water phantom CT numbers until water has a CT number equal to zero. After a successful self
calibration, any water phantom scanned against a small or large CAL has a CT number near zero.
1. Select |EXAM RX|

Exam Rx

2. Place the QA phantom on the phantom holder.


D Align the water section with the laser lights.
3. Select |SCANNER UTILITIES|

Scanner Utilities

4. Select Center Phantom from the Scanner Utilities Menu.

D Center the Phantom.

5. Select the Service Protocol N Numbers

–or–
6. Manually select the scan parameters in Table 10–1 and 10–2.
TABLE 10–1
SMALL CAL N #

Phantom Scan FOV kV mA Thickness Scan Time # of Scans Display FOV


20 S 80 170 10 4 2 25cm
20 S 100 240 10 4 2 25cm
20 S 120 200 10 4 2 25cm
20 S 140 140 10 4 2 25cm

10–9
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

TABLE 10–2
LARGE CAL N #

Phantom Scan FOV kV mA Thickness Scan Time # of Scans Display FOV


20 L 120 200 10 4 2 25cm
20 L 140 140 10 4 2 25cm

7. Complete the scans.


8. Proceed to section 10–5, and use the worksheets in Table 10–3 and Table 10–4 to
record the values, and adjust the N numbers.

10–5 How to Analyze N Number Scans


1. Select |SERVICE|

Service
2. Select |SYSTEM INTEGRATION|

SYSTEM
INTEGRATION

3. Select |SYSTEM TESTS|

COMPUTER INTEGRATION
TABLE/GANTRY INTEGRATION
GENERATOR CALIBRATION
DAS INTEGRATION
ALIGNMENTS
SYSTEM TESTS

4. Select |START|

. . . START. . .

10–10
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

5. Select |Image Analysis|

System Tests

Fast Cal
Perpendicular Alignment
Tomo Plane Indication
Exposure Time Accuracy
System Scanning Tests
Set/Adjust N#s
Image Analysis
Phantom Self Calibration
48 Bowtie Filter Test
Image Series
––––
Qcal
xtalk
alpha vector
Hot ISO*
Air cal
P cal
System Reli Scanning
Save System State
Heat Soak & Seasoning
Streak Test
*Hot ISO is not available
on all software releases. Teflon Pin Test

6. When the Browser opens, select an Exam/Series to analyze.


7. Select |Manual ROI|

Manual
ROI

8. A viewer opens with a 14cm X 14cm box located in the middle of the image.
9. Click the right mouse button once to measure and display the ROI.
D To examine subsequent images: Click the right mouse button 2X to close
the image and result window, and select a new image from the browser.
10. Use the Table 10–3 worksheet record the phantom values for each technic.
D N# adjustment instructions begin with Step 11.

10–11
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

TABLE 10–3
PHANTOM SELF CALIBRATION WORKSHEET

Small CAL 80kV 100kV 120kV 140kV


Exam#
Slice 1
Slice 2
2 Slice Average
N#
Large CAL 80kV 100kV 120kV 140kV
Exam# n/a n/a
Slice 1 n/a n/a
Slice 2 n/a n/a
2 Slice Average n/a n/a
N# n/a n/a

Use a 14 X 14 cm box; CTn = CTc–AvXc, where:


D CTn = New CT number
D CTc = Current CT number
D AvXc = 2 slice avg. mean of the 14cm X 14cm box.
Specification for the 2 Slice Average= 0.0 +1.5
11. Select |Adjust CT Number| from the detailed calibration screen. See Illustration 10–6.
ILLUSTRATION 10–6
DETAILED CALIBRATION SCREEN

Detailed Calibration

Calibration Small Large Adjust CT


Type Air SFOV SFOV Number...

KV 80KV 100KV 120KV 140KV

Aperture Scaled 1mm 3mm 5mm 7mm 10mm

10–12
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

12. When the N# adjustment tool opens, type/enter the values you recorded in Table 10–3,
into the table on the screen.
a. Start a new exam to accept the values you entered into the table.
b. Repeat the process until the N numbers meet the specification.
c. Fill in the following N Number Summary Table.
TABLE 10–4
N NUMBER SUMMARY

Scan FOV 80kV 100kV 120kV 140kV


Small
Large n/a n/a

Specification for the 2 Slice Average= 0.0 1.5

j Check box when complete.

10–6 System Tests

10–6–1 Introduction

Use the System Tests in the following sections to exercise all aspects of the system, to assure
system integrity, before turnover to the Customer. Although the Means, Standard Deviation and
Resolution specifications do not apply during system functional tests, treat any artifact or image
anomaly as a failure.
If you encounter a failure during the system tests:
D Record any evidence of artifacts, such as rings, streaks, shading, cupping, noise, or center
artifacts.
D Correct artifacts, System Test or Image Series failures when they occur. Any delay in repairs
could increase the number of retests.

10–6–2 Table/Gantry Alignment Procedure

Note: This procedure is now performed by the Mechanical Installers in Section 1.

10–13
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

10–6–3 Tomographic Plane Indication


1. Place the QA phantom on the phantom holder.
2. Turn ON the internal alignment lights, and drive the phantom into the gantry opening,
until the black line on the phantom lines up with the internal laser lights.
3. Verify that BOTH internal axial lasers line up along the black line on the QA phantom. If
not, check table/gantry, cradle, and/or laser alignment.
4. Center the phantom in the scan plane with the Calibration program.

5. Select the Service Protocol Tomo Plane Indication

–or–
6. Manually select the scan parameters in Table 10–5.
TABLE 10–5
TOMOGRAPHIC PLANE INDICATION SCAN PARAMETERS

Scan Type kV mA SFOV Thickness Scan Time Start Loc. End Loc. Algorithm
Axial 120 100 Small 1mm 2.0sec I5.0 S5.0 Bone detail

7. Display the image series, and locate the scan plane indicator, the longest bar in the bar
pattern on the right side of the phantom.
D The right side of the phantom corresponds to the side of the image labeled
L on the display screen.
8. On the HHS Data Sheet, record the scan location (shown on the image annotation) of
the image with the darkest scan plane indicator (darkest long bar).
9. If your system meets all the installation and alignment specifications, the image at scan
location zero (S0.0) should contain the scan plane indicator. If scan location S1.0 or
scan location I1.0 has the darkest bar, the system still meets the specification.
D The scan plane deviation should equal S0.0 1.0mm.
D If necessary, adjust the internal alignment light position to meet
the S0.01.0mm requirement.
10. Repeat the Tomographic Plane Indication test with the external alignment lights.
a. Use the external alignment light, and press the external landmark.
b. Verify the external light lines up along the black line on BOTH the left and right sides
of the QA phantom.
c. The scan plane indication must fall within the S0.0 +1.0mm specification.
11. Check the box on Form 4879.

j Check box when complete.

10–14
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

10–6–4 System Scanning Test

Use the System Scanning Test to verify hardware functionality. Review images for visible artifacts,
and review the message log for unacceptable errors.
1. Place the QA phantom on the cradle.
D Drive the table to an elevation of 100.
D Align the black line on the phantom with the internal laser lights.

Note: Never scan above 50mA without first placing a phantom in the field of view. Levels in
excess of 50mA can cause temporary radiation damage to the detector that lasts
several hours. If you acquire image series cals with a radiation damaged detector, the
cals may cause artifacts in subsequent image series scans.

2. Select the Service Protocol System Scan/Cust Qual Reli

Note: When using the Service Protocol stop after the second Helical Series. It is not
necessary to proceed past that point in the protocol.

–or–
3. Manually select the scan parameters in Table 10–6.
TABLE 10–6
SYSTEM SCANNING TEST SCAN PARAMETERS

Scan Type kV mA SFOV Thickness Rotation Start Loc. End Loc. Tilt/Pitch
Time
Scout 120 40 – – – S200 I800 0°
Scout 120 40 – – – S200 I800 90°
Cine 120 50 Large 10mm 1.0sec S0 S0 1.0
Axial 120 50 Large 10mm 1.0sec S0 S0 I30
Axial 120 50 Large 10mm 1.0sec S0 S0 S30
Helical Full 120 50 Large 3mm 1.0sec S70 I77 1:1
Helical Full * 120 50 Large 3mm 0.8sec S70 I77 1:1
Helical Plus ** 120 50 Large 5mm 1.0sec S70 I75 1:1

* Helical 0.8 sec is an option, if your system does not have this option then the second Helical
protocol will default to Helical 1.0 sec.
** Helical Plus is an option, if your system does not have this option then the second Helical protocol
will default to Helical Full.
4. Complete the scans.

j Check box when complete.

10–15
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

10–7 Image Series

10–7–1 Scan Protocol

The person who acquires the image series has the responsibility to review the images, and verify
they meet the specifications listed on data sheets. Responsibilities also include and means and
standard deviation measurements, and keeping a record of failures that occur during the image
series.
Unless otherwise stated, use the following scan parameters during the Image Series acquisition:
D Scan FOV equal to display FOV (Field of View)
D 512x512 matrix size
D Peristaltic ON

Note: Consider any image series scan that does not meet specifications as failing.
For means and standard deviations, 90% of the slices must pass.

Any failure on a particular technic requires at least 10 additional slices to evaluate effectively.
Systems with metal–free cradles have a phantom holder with a perpendicular adjustment (Z–axis)
knob on it. Each time you change phantoms, make sure you use a bubble level, and the Z–axis
knob on the phantom holder, to level the phantom.
Image Troubleshooting: If you loaded the factory supplied phantom calibrations on your system,
and you followed the Z–Align and Air Calibration procedures in this manual, the image series should
pass. If you encounter image failures with the factory supplied cal files, consult the Image
troubleshooting flowchart in Appendix 10I , on page 10–49.

10–7–2 Data Recording: Means and Standard Deviation


Any failure on a particular technic requires at least a 10 additional slices to evaluate effectively. For
means and standard deviations, 90% of the slices must pass.
D Record means to 2 decimal places, and round to the nearest one–tenth, (1decimal place) when
you compare the resulting values to the spec.
D Record standard deviations to 2 decimal places, then round off to 1 decimal place, to compare it
to the spec.
D Average standard deviations: Use 2 decimal places to average the values, then round off to one
place.
Before you record the means and standard deviations, check the image data sheets to determine
whether to average the means and standard deviations, or record them slice by slice.
D Make sure you record all the required Image data on the HHS data sheets.

10–16
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

10–7–3 Term Definitions


Xc Mean CT number for the specified center coordinates of the phantom image.
AvXc Average Mean CT number for the center of the phantom image: Average the mean
CT value for all specified center coordinates of all slices in an exam.
Xo Mean CT number for the outside of the phantom image: Average the mean CT
value for all specified outside coordinates of one slice.
AvXo Average outside mean CT number for the number of slices in an exam.
AvSDc Average image noise about the center image coordinate (measured as the standard
deviation) of all slices in an exam.
AvSDo Average image noise (standard deviation) for the outside of a phantom: Average of
all outside coordinates of all the slices in an exam.

10–7–4 Image Series for CT/i System

Note: If you have a 36KW System, which is standard, scan this at 300 mA not 400 mA.

1. Place the 48cm phantom on the phantom holder.


D Align phantom with the internal laser lights.
D Center the phantom with the Calibration program.
2. Select the Image Series 48cm of the Service Protocol,

Image Series 48cm

3. Select the Series which applies to your system;

Second Series of the Service Protocol, for a standard 1 second system.


or
Third Series of the Service Protocol, for a system with the 0.8 second scan option.

Use this series if you have the 0.8 sec scan option

Second Series OR Third Series

–or–
4. Manually select the scan parameters in Table 10–7.
TABLE 10–7
CT/I IMAGE SERIES SCAN PARAMETERS – 48KW OPTION

Scan Phantom kV mA SFOV Thickness Scan Time Start Loc. # of scans


Type
Axial 48cm 120 400 Large 10mm 4.0sec S0 4

5. Record the data on the data sheet, and verify the images meet specifications.
6. Proceed to section 10–7–4–1, to analyze the image series.

10–17
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

10–7–4–1 Analyze Image Series


1. Display the System Test Menu.

2. Select Image Analysis

3. When the Browser opens, select the 48cm Exam.


4. Select |Series Means| to open a viewer and results window.

Series
Means

5. The results window reports the series means data.


D Record the results data on the data sheet, and verify it meets all
specifications.

10–18
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

10–7–5 QA Image Series


1. Place the QA phantom, 46–241852G1, on the phantom holder.
D Align with the black line with the laser lights.
D Center with the Calibration program.

2. Select the Service Protocol Image Series QA

Note: If your system has 4.0 or greater product software delete the second group
(slices 5 – 8 ) of this exam before scanning.

Delete
Selected
Group
–or–
3. Manually select the scan parameters in Table 10–8.
TABLE 10–8
IMAGE SERIES QA SCAN PARAMETERS

Scan Phantom kV mA SFOV Thickness Scan # of Comments


Type Type Time scans
Axial QA#1 120 170 Small 10mm 2.0sec 4 S0.0
Axial QA#1 120 170 Small 10mm 2.0sec 4 Bone Retro w/
DFOV = 15cm
Axial QA#1 120 340 Small 10mm 1.0sec 4 S0.0 – 48KW Systems
Only
Axial QA#2 120 170 Small 10mm 2.0sec 4 S35.0
Peristaltic OFF
Axial QA#3 120 170 Small 10mm 2.0sec 4 S50.0

4. Retrospectively reconstruct the first QA#1 scan with the Bone algorithm, and 15cm
Display FOV, for later analysis.
D Use the parameters in Table 10–8 to reconstruct the image.
5. Record the data on the data sheet, and verify the images meet specifications.
6. Proceed to section 10–7–5–1, to analyze the QA image series.

10–19
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

10–7–5–1 Analyze QA Image Series

Return to the Image Analysis tool.


1. Select the QA Exam from the Image Browser.
2. Select |QA#1| to open a viewer and results window.

QA
#1

3. Refer to Illustration 10–7, to adjust the image window:


a. Press and hold the middle mouse button.
b. Move the mouse in the horizontal and vertical directions to adjust the window width
and Window level, until the line pair becomes visible.
ILLUSTRATION 10–7
ADJUST WINDOW WIDTH/LEVEL WITH MOUSE
Hold Down

Move for Window Width Adjust

Move for Window Level Adjust

10–20
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

4. Refer to Illustration 10–8. To position the ROI box, and analyze:


a. Move: Position the mouse cursor over the box. Press and hold the left mouse
button, and move the mouse to reposition the box.
b. Accept: Click the right mouse button once, to accept the current position.
c. Accept: Toggle the right mouse button to accept the remaining ROIs.
5. The system calculates and displays the MTF and Contrast Scale in the Image Analysis
Results window.
ILLUSTRATION 10–8
REPOSITION ROI WITH MOUSE
Click once

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
to accept

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ Move

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ 2X Click

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
to exit.
3

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ2

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
1

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
6. Double click the right mouse button to exit.
You cannot reposition Box 1. It automatically
appears over the F line pairs.

7. The software automatically evaluates the QA#2 & 3.


D Select the Exam/Series and the QA#2 or QA#3 Softkeys to execute.
8. Record the data on the data sheet, and verify the scans meet all specifications.

10–21
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

10–8 IMAGE DATA SHEET


48cm/L

Scan parameters: 48cm/L/10mm/120KV/400mA/4sec – 48KW Systems Only

Exam # AvXo– Scan


# of AvXc AvXo AvXc AvSDo Comments Tech
Slice Aprov

SPECS ––– ––– ––– 8.5 ––– < 14.0 * ––– –––

*If your AvSDo fails check to make sure you did not shoot this technic at 1mm.

Scan parameters: 48cm/L/10mm/120KV/300mA/4sec – 36KW Systems Only

Exam # AvXo– Scan


# of AvXc AvXo AvXc AvSDo Comments Tech
Slice Aprov

SPECS ––– ––– ––– 8.5 ––– < 16.2 * ––– –––

*If your AvSDo fails check to make sure you did not shoot this technic at 1mm.

Box Size: 45 x 45 pixels


Center Coordinates:256, 256
Outside Coordinates: 256, 60 452, 256 256, 452 60, 256
Image Acceptance/Date: _______________
Certified Image Reviewer:_______________
Artifact Limits:
D Rings: 48/L; 30 to 36 counts Smudge: 48/L; 6.8 counts
42/L; 15 to 18 counts 1mm; 14.0 counts
1mm; NA 42/L; 6.1 counts
1mm; 12 counts
D Band: 8.0 counts Streaks: 4.0 counts
D Band Radius: 0 to 23.5cm Center Artifact: N/A
D Clump: 48/L; 3.0 SIGMA
42/L; 2.2 SIGMA
1mm; N/A
D Center Spot: N/A

10–22
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

10–9 IMAGE DATA SHEET


QA Phantom

QA#1 scan parameters: S/10mm/120KV/170mA/2 sec


Scan at 0mm– Use this scan data for following Bone Retro.
Record data on Form 4879.

Exam # MTF Scan


# of MTF 4 slice Contrast Scale Comments/Artifacts Tech
Slice average Aprov

–––
–––
–––
SPECS ––– 0.68 to 1.0 110.0 to 130.0 ––– –––

Box Size: 17 x 17 pixels


Image Acceptance/Date: _______________
Certified Image Reviewer:_______________
For Reference Only:
Use the manual method for calculating MTF and Contrast Scale
only when you cannot access Tool QA#1.

 
 

Contrast Scale = mean of B–mean of C.



SD = SD of ROI Box over F slits.

  
SD = (SD + SC ) /2

  

Modulation =

ǸSd AĂ Ă2 * SD aveĂ Ă 2
MTF = 2.2 (Modulation/Contrast Scale)



2723

10–23
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

10–10 IMAGE DATA SHEET


QA Phantom

QA#1 scan parameters: S/10mm/120KV/170mA/2 sec/


Bone Retro/DISPLAY FOV=15cm
Scan at 0mm

Exam # Line Scan


# of Patterns Comments/Artifacts Tech
Slice Visible Aprov

SPECS B,C,D,E,F ––– –––

Image Acceptance/Date: _______________


Certified Image Reviewer:_______________
QA#1 scan parameters: S/10mm/120KV/340mA/1 sec – 48KW Systems Only
Scan at 0mm
Record results on Form 4879.

Exam # MTF Scan


# of MTF 4 slice Contrast Scale Comments/Artifacts Tech
Slice average Aprov

–––
–––
–––
SPECS ––– 0.65 to 1.00 110.0 to 130.0 ––– –––

Box Size: 17 x 17 pixels


Image Acceptance/Date: _______________
Certified Image Reviewer:_______________

10–24
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

10–11 IMAGE DATA SHEET


QA Phantom

QA#2 scan parameters: S/10mm/120KV/170mA/2 sec/Peristaltic OFF


Scan at 35mm (S35.0)

Exam# Visible Holes Scan


and (View at window of 20) Contrast Factor Comments/Artifacts Tech
Slice# Aprov

SPECS See Below 2.0 to 12.0 ––– –––

Visible Number of Visible Number of Smallest Visible Hole:


Contrast Factor Holes: Lower Limit* Holes: Upper Limit* Size
2.00 to 3.99 2 5 7.5mm
4.00 to 7.99 3 5 5.0mm
8.00 to 12.00 4 5 3.0mm

*Required number of visible holes depends on the contrast factor.


2 out of the 4 scans taken must meet this specification.
Image Acceptance/Date: _______________
Certified Image Reviewer:_______________
For Reference Only:
Use the manual method for calculating Contrast Factor only when you cannot access Tool QA#2.

ROI D

ROI E ROI D 49 X 9 pixels x=256, y=200


ROI E 49 X 9 pixels x= 256, y=235
10mm 7.5mm 5.0mm 3.0mm 1.5mm Contrast Factor = Mean E – Mean D

10–25
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

10–12 IMAGE DATA SHEET


QA Phantom

QA#3 scan parameters: S/10mm/120KV/170mA/2 sec


Scan at 50mm
Record data on Form 4879.

Exam # Scan
# of Mean Std Dev Average Std Dev Comments/Artifacts Tech
Slice (average of 4 slices) Aprov

–––
–––
–––
SPECS 0.0 + 1.5 ––– See Below* ––– –––

Box Size: 51 x 51 pixels at Coordinate 256,256

*If tube has < 5000 scans, spec = 3.00 to 3.60.


If tube has > 5000 scans, spec = 3.00 to 3.80.
Image Acceptance/Date: _______________
Certified Image Reviewer:_______________

10–26
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

10–13 IMAGE DATA SHEET


QA Phantom

QA#3/S/10mm/120KV/170mA/2 sec (Step 5.5.1)


Do not scan. Evaluate images from previous step.

Exam # AvXo– Scan


# of AvXc AvXo AvXc Comments/Artifacts Tech
Slice Aprov

SPECS ––– ––– ––– ––– –––

Box Size: 31 x 31 pixels


Center Coordinates:256, 256
Outside Coordinates: 256, 95
417, 257
256,417
95, 256
Artifact Limits:
D Rings: 4.0/4.8 cts
D Band: 2.8 cts
D Band Radius: 0–8.5 cm
D Clump: N/A
D Center Spot: N/A
D Center Artifact: 3.5 Std. Dev.
D Smudge: 2.2 counts
1mm; 4.0 counts
D Streaks: 4.0 cts
Image Acceptance/Date: _______________
Certified Image Reviewer:_______________

10–27
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

10–14 Save System State

Use the Service Desktop Manager Commands that follow, to create the System State MOD.
1. Load an MOD into the drive on the front of the operators console.
2. Display the Service Desktop Manager:
a. Select |PM|
b. Select |System State| to open the System State Save/Restore menu.
c. Select |All|
d. Select |Save|
3. When the save operation completes, select |File| and |Quit| from the pull down menu.
4. Remove the MOD from the drive

j Check box when complete.

10–15 Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning


1. If you ran the Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning during Generator Calibration, skip this
section.
2. Place a 48cm phantom in the beam, to eliminate X–Ray damage to the detector.
D Ignore the image quality of the reconstructed images.
3. Manually select the scan parameters in Table 10–9.
4. Select the 256 stat recon parameter, to decrease the reconstruction time.
5. Turn OFF the auto film and auto archive functions.
6. Acquire the series.
TABLE 10–9
HEAT SOAK AND SEASONING SCAN PARAMETERS

kV mA Time ISD # of Slices Aperture


120 200 4 15 sec 40 1 mm
5.5 second inter–group delay
120 40 1 1 sec 10 1 mm
2.2 second inter–group delay
140 40 1 1 sec 20 1 mm

j Check box when complete.


Chapter 10 Complete

10–28
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

APPENDIX 10A EXPOSURE TIME ACCURACY

1. Turn on Monitor Enable to read the scan times.


a. Select |End Exam| to halt any exam in progress.

Note: Step a. is necessary for Monitor Enable to turn on.

b. Display the Service Desktop Manager.


c. Select |System Integration|.
d. Select |Generator Calibration|.
e. Select |Start| to open the Generator Installation and Verification menu.
f. Select |Bleeder Setup| (DDC) to open the
DIagnostic Data Collection menu.
g. Select |Monitor Enable| to display the scan times in the message log.
D Do NOT Dismiss, or close, the DDC window, because it turns OFF the
monitor enable function.
2. Toggle to the Exam Rx desktop.

3. Select the Service Protocol Exposure Time Accuracy

–or–
4. Manually select the scan parameters in Table 10–10.
TABLE 10–10
EXPOSURE TIME ACCURACY SCAN PARAMETERS

Scan Type kV mA SFOV Thickness Scan Start Loc. End Loc. Pitch
Time
Scout 120 40 – – – S10 I10 –
Scout 120 40 – – – S75 I75 –
Scout 120 40 – – – S300 I300 –
Segment 120 40 Large 1mm 0.6sec S0 –
1.0 sec Axial
Axial 120 40 Large 1mm 1.0sec S0 –
Axial 120 40 Large 1mm 4.0sec S0 –
Helical 120 40 Large 10mm – S145 I145 1:1

5. Complete the scans, and record the scan times displayed in the message log, on Form
4879.
6. When complete, toggle to the Service Desktop, and |Dismiss| the DDC window to turn
OFF the Monitor Enable function.
D Failure to turn OFF Monitor Enable fills the message log with kV, mA and
scan times.

j Check box when complete.

10–29
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

APPENDIX 10B STREAK TEST

1. Place the 48cm phantom on the phantom holder.


D Align the phantom to the internal laser lights.
D Use the Calibration program to center the phantom.

2. Select the Service Protocol Streak Test

–or–
3. Manually select the scan parameters in Table D–1.
TABLE D–1
STREAK TEST SCAN PARAMETERS

Scan Type kV mA SFOV Thickness Scan Time # of scans


Axial 120 200 Large 5mm 1.0sec 60

4. Evaluate all images for streaks or rings.


5. Fix all streak or ring failures.
All 60 slices ring and streak free ? YES ______

10–30
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

APPENDIX 10C TEFLON PIN

1. Place the Teflon Pin on the phantom holder.


D Align the pin to the internal laser lights.
D Use the Calibration program to center the pin.

2. Select the Service Protocol Teflon Pin

–or–
3. Manually select the scan parameters in Table E–1.
TABLE E–1
TEFLON PIN SCAN PARAMETERS

Scan kV mA SFOV Thickness Scan Peristaltic Algorithm Pin Location


Type Time
Axial 120 40 Small 5mm 2.0sec OFF Standard ISO 0.5mm
Axial 120 40 Small 5mm 4.0sec OFF Standard ISO 0.5mm
Axial 120 40 Small 5mm 4.0sec OFF Standard Down 5cm 0.1cm
from ISO
Axial 120 40 Small 5mm 2.0sec OFF Standard Down 5cm 0.1cm
from ISO

4. Retrospectively reconstruct all the images with the Soft Tissue algorithm.
Teflon Pin – Evaluation
1. Select |Utilities|.
2. Select |Image Analysis|.
3. Select the Exam/Series/Image you plan to evaluate from the browser.
4. Select |Cloverleaf Artifact|.
5. Evaluate all images for artifacts.
6. Record the standard deviation values in the tables on page 10–32.
7. This analysis also provides the numerical data required to evaluate cloverleaf and
multiple streaks.

10–31
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Teflon Pin – Tables

TABLE E–2
AT ISO 0.5MM

Exam# Image# Scan Time Algorithm ROI (Std Dev)


2 Standard
2 Standard
4 Standard
4 Standard
2 Soft Tissue
2 Soft Tissue
4 Soft Tissue
4 Soft Tissue
Exam# Image# Scan Time Algorithm Goalpost
4 Soft Tissue
4 Soft Tissue

TABLE E–3
5CM BELOW ISO

Exam# Scan Time Visually Acceptable Yes/No?


4
2

10–32
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Teflon Pin – Artifacts


This section describes the Teflon Pin Artifacts you may observe, and describes the pin scan you
should use to further qualify the artifact source.

Multiple Streaks (Pin at ISO)


Multiple streaks, very close to the centered pin, frequently occur in 2 sec. scans.
ILLUSTRATION E–1
TEFLON PIN ARTIFACTS
Streaks Reference ROI
Region most effected by artifacts

ÉÉÉÉÉ Teflon Pin

ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ Cloverleaf Artifacts

Clover Leaf (3 White Lobes)

You may see a cloverleaf artifact, consisting of 3 white lobes radiating from the Teflon Pin, in the 2
and 4 second scan of the pin at ISO. Refer to Illustration E–1.
D If you see the artifact in the Standard algorithm scan, but you do NOT see the artifact in the Soft
Tissue reconstruction of that scan, realign isocenter.
D If you see the artifact in the Standard algorithm scan, AND in the Soft Tissue reconstruction of
that scan, take an LVDT measurement to further quantify the problem.
Potential Defect: a bad Gantry bearing, or improperly machined rotating Gantry

10–33
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Radial Wagon Spokes from ISO Centered Pin


If you see evenly spaced wiggly streaks, radiating from the pin edge, and extending to the edge of
the field of view, then suspect excessive rotor wobble.

Note: Make sure the streaks point toward the radius of the Teflon Pin. A highly microphonic
DAS or detector channel may cause similar streaks to point toward some other radius.

Potential Defect: a faulty rotor acceleration circuit

Vertical Streak Pair on Off–Centered Teflon Pin


This artifact appears similar to the twalffie streaks, except you only see the streak pair in the
off–centered pin scan.
Gantry hysteresis (indicating a bad main bearing), or an accumulated DAS trigger timing error, could
cause this problem.
Potential Defect: a slippage in the Gantry encoder shaft

Deep Star Artifact on Off–Centered Pin


You may see a six or twelve point streak artifact, resembling a star, on the off–centered pin.

Note: You may notice some strong sector shading radiating from the pin. Consider this
shading normal. However, if the star points appear deep and pronounced, especially if
several white nodes appear along the edge of the point, then examine the Gantry for a
bad encoder or bent encoder shaft.

10–34
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

APPENDIX 10D ARTIFACT DEFINITIONS

Center Smudge
Definition:
A dark or light area, with no defined edges, located near the center of the reconstruction.
Method of Measurement for all images, including 12.5 cm (5 inch):
D 48cm/L and 42cm/L images: position a 13x13 pixel ellipse over the smudge, and measure the
mean of the smudge.
D Other technics: position a minimum 13x13 pixel ellipse (169 pixels), over the smudge, and
measure the mean of the smudge, If necessary increase the size of the ellipse to approximate
the size of the smudge.
Reference Mean
D 48cm/L and 42cm/L technics: position a 41x41 pixel ellipse about the center of the
reconstruction circle, and use it to measure the reference, background mean.
D Other technics: Use an ellipse at least 4 times larger than the ellipse used to measure the mean
of the smudge, to measure the reference, background mean.
Failure:
The technic fails when the difference between the mean of the smudge and the reference exceeds
the corresponding limit value for that technic.
Application:

10mm 7mm 5mm 3mm 1mm

48/L ––– ––– ––– 48/L


42/L ––– ––– ––– 42/L
––– 35/M 35/M 35/M –––
35/L ––– ––– ––– –––
20/S ––– ––– ––– 20/S
12.5/S ––– 12.5/S ––– –––

If either the 48/L or 42/L pass the test for a given kV and aperture, consider both the 48/L and 42/L
having passed that technic.
Failure Rate:
80% of all scans at a given technic must meet the spec.

10–35
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Rings
Definition:
A dark or light circle, or partially closed circle, approximately 1 to 3 pixels in width.
Method of Measurement:
Ring mean value: Deposit two ellipses bordering the ring or partial ring.
D Take care not to include pixels outside the ring within the ellipses. (You may magnify an image
up to 3X to help determine if a ring or partial ring exists.)
D Most rings consist of a dark and light ring pair; measure one color ring at a time.
48cm/L and 42cm/L technics: the ring must equal 0.5cm radius (1.0cm diameter), or greater.
D Measure rings smaller than 0.5cm radius for clump.
D Rings must have an arc of 30_ or greater to be considered a ring.
D Bone detail images must have a ring with at least a180_ arc to fail.
Background mean value:
Position a 2cm x 2cm (or larger) box over an unmagnified image, so it includes the ring or partial
ring, and measure the mean.
Failure:
The technic fails when the difference between the ring mean and the background mean exceeds the
corresponding limit value for that technic. The IA Program spec limit equals 1.2 times the spec limit
of the manual measurement.
Application:

10mm 7mm 5mm 3mm 1mm

48/L ––– ––– ––– –––


42/L ––– ––– ––– –––
––– 35/M 35/M 35/M –––
35/L ––– ––– ––– –––
20/S ––– ––– ––– 20/S
12.5/S ––– 12.5/S ––– –––

If either the 48/L or 42/L pass the test for a given kV and aperture, consider both the 48/L and 42/L
as having passed that technic.
Failure Rate:
48/L and 42/L technics: 80% of all slices must meet the spec at a given technic. All other technic:
No more than one ring every 250 slices

10–36
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Streaks
Definition:
Straight dark or light lines, of any length, across an image, usually 1 to 3 pixels in width.
Method of Measurement:
Mean of the Streak:
D Use the trace to outline the streak in a magnified or unmagnified image, then measure distance
or deposit cursors to measure.
D Most streaks consist of a dark and light streak pair, measure only one color streak at a time.
D Measure the mean of the streak.
Background mean:
D Measure the mean on both sides of the streaks.
Failure: The technic fails when the difference between the mean of the streak and the background
mean exceeds the corresponding limit value for that technic.
Application:
All images fall under the streak spec requirements.
Failure Rate:
It takes 100 streak free scans after the initial streak, to clear the streak failure. A repeat streak at
the same location with 250 scans or less between streaks requires corrective action.

Streaks Caused by High Voltage Disturbances


Definition:
Same as for Streaks above, except that High Voltage disturbances cause these streaks, which
result in missing DAS views. Often streaks of this origin occur in multiples, and appear to emanate
from a common point. We refer to multiple streaks of this type as ‘fan beam’ streaks.
Method of Measurement:
Use CD plot to look for missing views. A failure occurs when each a group of missing views creates
streaks in the corresponding image.
Application:
All images fall under the “Streaks Caused by High Voltage Disturbances” spec requirements.
Failure Rate:
Run the Heat Soak/Seasoning on systems that fail either of the following specs:
D A total of one group of 3 or less contiguous missing views that cause streaks is allowed in ten
48cm 120kV/400mA/1mm/1sec scans.
D All other technics are allowed one group of 3 of less contiguous missing views that cause streak
in 250 scans.

10–37
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Center Artifact
Definition:
A dark or light, well defined spot, 4 pixels in size, located in the center 16 pixels of the reconstruction
circle.
Method of measurement:
D Reference mean and standard deviation: Measure the mean and standard deviation of a 41 x
41 pixel box centered about X=256 and Y=256.
D Center Artifact Average (Ave.) The average of the 4 center pixel located at X (256,257) and Y
(256,257) or the average of any four pixel square box which includes any of the four center
pixels.
Failure:
The technic fails when the difference between the Center Artifact Average and the Reference Mean
exceeds the corresponding limit value for that technic.
Application:

10mm 7mm 5mm 3mm 1mm


––– 35/M 35/M 35/M –––
35/L ––– ––– ––– –––
20/S ––– ––– ––– 20/S

Failure Rate:
80% of all scans at a given technic must meet the spec.

Center Spot
Definition:
A dark or light area, consisting of 3 to 25 pixels near the center of reconstruction, that has no defined
edges.
Two types of failures can cause this artifact:
D Center Spot: Compare the mean of a 5x5 pixel box near the center to a 21x21 pixel box about
the center.
D Max pixel requirement: A positive center spot places a maximum limit on the maximum value(s)
allowed in the 5x5 pixel box.
Method of Measurement:
D Background mean: Measure the mean of a 21x21 pixel box centered at X=256, Y=256.
D Center spot mean: Measure the means of all 5x5 pixel boxes which include pixel X=256, Y=256
(25 5x5 boxes exist).
D Max Pixel value: Measure the most positive pixel in each of the 5x5 pixel boxes.
D Subtract the background mean from the center spot mean.

10–38
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Failure:
The technic fails when the difference between the Center Artifact Average and the Reference Mean
exceeds the corresponding limit value for that technic.
100kV and 140kV Failure:
D The center spot fails when the difference equals or exceeds 3.5
D The center spot fails when the difference equals or falls below –3.5.
D The Max pixel fails when the difference equals or exceeds 1.8 and the Max Pixel value equals or
exceeds 4.0.
120kV Failure: (5mm and 10mm only)
D The center spot fails when the difference equals or exceeds 3.2
D The center spot fails when the difference equals or falls below –3.2.
D The Max pixel fails when the difference equals or exceeds 1.5 and the Max Pixel value equals or
exceeds 4.0.
120kV failure: (1mm only)
D The Max pixel fails when the difference equals or exceeds 2.4 and the Max Pixel value equals or
exceeds 6.4.
D No Center Spot for 1mm scans
80kV Failure:
D The center spot fails when the difference equals or exceeds 3.5
D The center spot fails when the difference equals or falls below –3.5.
D No Max Pix for 80kV scans
Application:

10mm 7mm 5mm 3mm 1 mm


(Max Pixel Only)

12.5/S ––– 12.5/S ––– 12.5/S

Failure Rate:
90% of all scans at a given technic must meet the spec.

Clump
Definition:
Light or dark areas of varying intensity, consisting of 3 or more contiguous pixels at the center of
reconstructions
Method of Measurement:
Reference mean and Standard Deviation (Std. Dev.): Measure the mean and standard deviation of a
41x41 pixel box centered about X=256 and Y=256.
Find all pixels in a 9x9 pixel box, centered about X=256, Y=256, that fall outside the limits of the
reference mean plus/minus the value of the reference std. dev. times the limit number given for a
technic.

10–39
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Failure: A failing clump consists of three or more pixels that touch, and exceed the limit on the
same side of the reference mean (more positive or more negative)
Application:

10mm 5mm 3mm 1mm


48/L 48/L 48/L –––
42/L 42/L 42/L –––

If at any technic, one of the above passes, consider that technic as having passed.
Failure Rate:
80% of all scans at a given technic must meet the spec.

Center Spot
Definition:
A dark or light area, consisting of 3 to 25 pixels that has no defined edges, located near the center of
reconstruction.
Two types of failures cause this artifact:
D Center Spot: Compare the mean of a 5x5 pixel box, near the center, and a 21x21 pixel box
about the center.
D Max pixel requirement: A positive center spot places a limit on the maximum value(s) allowed in
the 5x5 pixel box.
Method of Measurement:
D Background mean: Measure the mean of a 21x21 pixel box centered at X=256, Y=256.
D Center spot mean: Measure the means of all 5x5 pixel boxes which include pixel X=256, Y=256
(25 5x5 boxes exist).
D Max Pixel value: measure the most positive pixel for each of the 5x5 pixel boxes.
Subtract the background mean from the center spot mean.
100kV and 140kV Failure:
D The center spot fails when the difference equals or exceeds 3.5
D The center spot fails when the difference equals or falls below –3.5.
D The Max pixel fails when the difference equals or exceeds 1.8 and the Max Pixel value equals or
exceeds 4.0.
120kV Failure: (5mm and 10mm only)
D The center spot fails when the difference equals or exceeds 3.2
D The center spot fails when the difference equals or falls below –3.2.
D The Max pixel fails when the difference equals or exceeds 1.5 and the Max Pixel value equals or
exceeds 4.0.

10–40
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

120kV Failure: (1mm only)


D The Max pixel fails when the difference equals or exceeds 2.4 and the Max Pixel value equals or
exceeds 6.4.
D No Center Spot for 1mm scans
80kV Failure:
D The center spot fails when the difference equals or exceeds 3.5
D The center spot fails when the difference equals or falls below –3.5.
D No Max Pix for 80kV scans
Application:

10mm 7mm 5mm 3mm 1 mm


(Max Pixel Only)

12.5/S ––– 12.5/S ––– 12.5/S

Failure Rate:
90% of all scans at a given technic must meet the spec.

Banding
Definition:
A dark or light circular area, greater than 3 pixels in width. The band may have less than 360
degrees of arc.
Method of Measurement:
Mean of band:
D Position two non–overlapping boxes, approximately the width of the band, over the worst portion
of the band. (Use one box when the band occurs near the center of the the image, and/or space
is limited.)
D Use a square or rectangular box with an area of at least 50 pixels.
D The mean of the band equals the average of the box means.
Background mean:
D Measure the mean of a box inside the radius of the band, and the mean of a box outside the
radius of the mean, on a radial through center of reconstruction.
D Use the average of the inside and outside means as the background mean.
D Use the same box size you used to measure the mean of the band. (Position both boxes on one
side of the band, when the band occurs near the center of the the image, and/or space is
limited.)
The image fails for band if the difference between the background mean and the mean of the band
exceeds the corresponding spec limit for that technic.

10–41
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

Application:

10mm 7mm 5mm 3mm 1mm Radius*


48/L ––– ––– ––– 48/L 0–24.0
35/L ––– ––– ––– ––– 0–15.8
––– 35/M 35/M 35/M ––– 0–17.5
20/S ––– ––– ––– 20/S 0–8.5
12.5/S ––– 12.5/S ––– ––– 0–5.1

* All location radii in cm.


Failure Rate:
80% of all scans at a given technic must pass the band requirements.

Visual Acceptability
In addition to the artifacts described in this appendix, review several techniques for visual
acceptability. Manufacturing Staging reviews the 12.5/S scans and the Tommy Phantom for visual
artifacts.
D 80% of all slices at a given technique must pass the corresponding visual artifact inspection.
D “Repeating artifacts” do not include artifacts that move or change color.

10–42
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

APPENDIX 10E Q–CAL

Run the Q–Cal procedure before you start to calibrate and scan.

Note: The Q–Cal function destroys all old phantom calibrations.

Important: Observe the following:


D Turn ON DAS power at least 2 hours before the start of calibration
D Start Q–Cal with a very cold tube. Do NOT take any exposures for at least one and one half
hours before you start Q–Cal. (This also means NO tube warmup). Complete tests that do not
interfere with tube cooling during this wait.
D Make sure the mylar window centers on the patient alignment lights. An improperly centered
mylar window could cause Q–Cal to fail, because one of the mylar window’s metal bands could
shade the detector.
Q–Cal
1. Select |SERVICE|

Service
2. Select |SYSTEM INTEGRATION|

SYSTEM
INTEGRATION

3. Select |SYSTEM TESTS|

COMPUTER INTEGRATION
TABLE/GANTRY INTEGRATION
GENERATOR CALIBRATION
DAS INTEGRATION
ALIGNMENTS
SYSTEM TESTS

10–43
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

4. Select |START|

. . . START. . .

5. Select |Qcal| to open a Shelltool.


System Tests

Fast Cal
Perpendicular Alignment
Tomo Plane Indication
Exposure Time Accuracy
System Scanning Tests
Set/Adjust N#s
Image Analysis
Phantom Self Calibration
48 Bowtie Filter Test
Image Series
––––
Qcal
xtalk
alpha vector
Hot ISO
Air cal
P cal
System Reli Scanning
Save System State
Heat Soak & Seasoning
Streak Test
Teflon Pin Test

6. Select Cal Types in order number of scans


(a) Cold Qcal 40 scans
(b) Heat Qcal 30 scans
(c) Hot Qcal 40 scans

Note: Recommended: In order to increase the chance that the Image Series passes, repeat
Q–Cal if more than 96 hours have elapsed since you completed the last Q–Cal.

j Check box when complete.

10–44
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

When to run Q–Cal


Note: Recommended: In order to increase the chance that the Image Series passes, repeat
Q–Cal if more than 96 hours have elapsed since you completed the last Q–Cal.

Run Q–Cal any time you adjust or replace any of the following components.
The original Q–Cal remains valid until you:
D Adjust or replace the Collimator
D Replace the X–Ray tube
D Replace the Detector
D Move or replace one or more ADC Boards.
D Adjust Plane of Rotation (POR)
D Adjust Beam on Window (BOW)
D Adjust Isocenter

10–45
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

APPENDIX 10F CALIBRATE CROSSTALK

1. Select |xtalk| to open a Shelltool.


System Tests

Fast Cal
Perpendicular Alignment
Tomo Plane Indication
Exposure Time Accuracy
System Scanning Tests
Set/Adjust N#s
Image Analysis
Phantom Self Calibration
48 Bowtie Filter Test
Image Series
––––
Qcal
xtalk
alpha vector
Hot ISO
Air cal
P cal
System Reli Scanning
Save System State
Heat Soak & Seasoning
Streak Test
Teflon Pin Test

2. Select Cal Types in order number of scans


3. 4 – Xtalk Air 4 scans
a. Reference the table to report the the table height to the Gantry Display.
b. Position the table as low as possible.
c. Adjust the phantom holder as high as possible, with respect to the table.
d. Place the Crosstalk phantom on the phantom holder, and use the alignment lights to
center it.
e. Raise the table 180 mm from the centered position.
4. Execute the Crosstalk phantom scans:
5. Select Cal Type number of scans
D 5 – Xtalk Phantom 8 scans

j Check box when complete.

10–46
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

APPENDIX 10G ALPHA VECTOR

1. Select |alpha vector| to open a Shelltool

System Tests

Fast Cal
Perpendicular Alignment
Tomo Plane Indication
Exposure Time Accuracy
System Scanning Tests
Set/Adjust N#s
Image Analysis
Phantom Self Calibration
48 Bowtie Filter Test
Image Series
––––
Qcal
xtalk
alpha vector
Hot ISO
Air cal
P cal
System Reli Scanning
Save System State
Heat Soak & Seasoning
Streak Test
Teflon Pin Test

2. Select Cal Types in order number of scans


D 6 – Afterglow 2 scans

Note: Do NOT exit this program until the rotor comes down, so the software can calculate and
install the afterglow vector.

3. When the rotor stops, select |Shutdown| to shut down the system.

Note: Do NOT select the Log Out function at this time, as it may inadvertently delete software
in the /usr/g directory.

4. When shutdown completes, restart the system.

j Check box when complete.

10–47
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

APPENDIX 10H MEASURE ARTIFACTS

Image Analysis Program


The Image Analysis tool, located in Service, System Integration, Image Analysis, calculates the
means and series means of a designated group of images.
D The tool positions the first ROI in the center of the phantom, and the
remaining ROIs around the outside of the phantom.
D The means tool calculates the means and standard deviation in 5
designated locations on every image in the series.
D The series means tool provides averages for individual images, as well as
the total average of all the image ROIs in an exam.
To access the means tool or series means tool:
1. Display the Service Desktop Manager.
2. Select |System Integration|
3. Select |Image Analysis|
4. Select the exam/series from the browser.
5. The system automatically calculates and displays the means.
Artifact Measurement
Note: You must insert a security key to access these diagnostic tools.

Use the following sequence of softkey selections to execute all artifact analysis programs. Each
artifact analysis program provides a set of on–screen prompts, to guide you through the
corresponding tool application.
1. Display the Top Level Screen.
2. Select |Utilities|
3. Select |Image Analysis|
4. Select the exam/series from the browser.
5. Select |Smudge|, |CA|, |Band|, |Ring|. . . etc.
6. Follow on screen prompts, to display the results of each calculation.
Appendix 10D , page 10–35 contains Artifact definitions.

10–48
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

APPENDIX 10I IMAGE TROUBLESHOOTING

Image Troubleshooting
Use this flowchart when you troubleshoot image problems on a system with factory supplied
calibration. This flowchart assumes you followed the Z–Align and Calibration procedures in this
manual.

Start

Center Smudge Rings in Image


Uniformity
Cupping

90min Tube Cool Down


(Brings X–Ray beam
to a known state)
Full Phantom
Calibrations

POR w/film
BOW
Create new Z–Align Baseline

QCAL

Air/Phantom Cals

Shoot Image Series

End

10–49
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 8 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

APPENDIX 10J SCAN GE PERFORMANCE PHANTOM

This appendix has been removed.

To scan the GE Performance Phantom see manual PN 2103644.

10–50
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 4 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

CHAPTER 11 – F4879

11–1 Form F4879


Record the system installation data on the following Form 4879.
Keep any HHS data sheets sent from the factory with the F4879 data
collected during the installation.
APPENDIX 1A

APPENDIX 11B
APPENDIX 1C
APPENDIX 1D
APPENDIX 1E
APPENDIX 1F
APPENDIX 1G
APPENDIX 1H
APPENDIX 1I
APPENDIX 1J
APPENDIX 1K
APPENDIX 1L
APPENDIX 1M
APPENDIX 2N

11–1
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HISPEED CT/i INSTALLATION MANUAL
REV 4 Proprietary to General Electric Company DIRECTION 2136597–100

NOTES

11–2
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HHS Data Record for HSA & CT/i
REV 4 DIRECTION 46–000030F4879X

DATA RECORD FOR CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE


Where Installed

City State

Customer’s Telephone Number Room No.

System I.D. No.

Operator’s Console (Master Control)

Model Number Serial Number

System Gantry

Model Number Serial Number

Dates of Tests Performed by

Test Equipment Used (If Applicable)


Name Manufacturer Model Number Serial Number Calib. Due
HV Bleeder
Oscilloscope
DMM

Traceability
The Component Locator Installation Report has been completed and sent to the Product Locator File.
Yes No

Certified Component Changes


Equipment Model Number Serial Number Install Date Exp. Ctr. Reading
Old Tube Casing
Old Tube Insert
New Tube Casing
New Tube Insert
Old Detector
New Detector
Old Collimator
New Collimator
Old Anode Tank
New Anode Tank
Old Cathode Tank
New Cathode Tank

F4879X Page 1 of 12
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HHS Data Record for HSA & CT/i
REV 4 DIRECTION 46–000030F4879X

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE CHECKS

Inst. Tube P.M.


Procedure is required for those components listed (Not crossed out).
HV
Det. Col.
Tank

ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Inst. Tube P.M.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
mA METER CHECK *HHS REQUIREMENT Initials: _______________

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Det.

Circuit ON
A/D Range
Anode mA 15 – 25
Cathode mA 15 – 25

DVM – A/D = Delta


Compare Delta to Limits

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Inst. Tube P.M.
mA METER VERIFICATION *HHS REQUIREMENT Initials: _______________

ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Det. Col. HV
Tank

Circuit OFF Circuit ON


DVM A/D Delta Limits +/– DVM A/D Delta Limits+/–
Anode KV 0.0 : : 0.5 Anode KV 50.0 : : 7.5
Cathode KV 0.0 : : 0.5 Cathode KV 50.0 : : 7.5
Total KV 0.0 : : 0.5 Total KV 100.0 : : 15.0
Anode mA 0.5 Anode mA 4.5
Cathode mA 0.5 Cathode mA 4.5

DVM – A/D = Delta : Ignore these values at this time.


Compare Delta to Limits

ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
Inst. Tube P.M.
Completed: -
ÇÇÇÇ
New Tube Seed Shift

ÇÇÇÇ
Det. Col. HV
Tank

F4879X Page 2 of 12
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HHS Data Record for HSA & CT/i

ÇÇ
REV 4 DIRECTION 46–000030F4879X

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Inst. Tube
Tube ‘Z’ Axis Alignment (Formerly Tube Plane of Rotation, POR) Completed: -

ÇÇ
Det. Col.

1. Z–Align Used: Adjusted In Specification. (go to Detector Z–Axis, step A)

OR
2. Tube Plane of Rotation (POR) using Film.

Choose Tube Type:

MX165CT

10 mm Aperture measurement spec 0 to –0.01” (0 to –0.25mm)


1.0 mm Aperture beam is visual
(go to Detector Z–Axis, step B or C)
MX200

10 mm Aperture measurement spec 0 to +0.01” (0 to +0.25mm)


1.0 mm Aperture beam is visual
(go to Detector Z–Axis, step B or C)

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Inst. Tube

ÇÇ
Detector Z–Axis (Formerly Beam On Window, BOW) Completed: -

ÇÇ
Det. Col.

1. If Z–Align was used for ‘Z’ Axis Alignment,then detector Z–Axis will already be within specification. No
additional adjustment will be necessary.

OR
2. Using Trapezoid Alignment Tool “Beam on Window” is within Spec.

OR
3. Using Film
Choose the correct tube type:

MX165CT

Three films are taken and the X–Ray Beam must be centered on the face of the Detector within the following
specifications. Note that the Beam is off–centered on side of the Detector Window Center which is toward
the Gantry.

XF – XR =+ 0.06” 0.03” Record XF _________________


(+1.5mm 0.8mm) Record XR _________________
Subtract _________________

MX200

Three films are taken and the X–Ray Beam must be centered on the face of the Detector within the following
specifications. Note that the Beam is off–centered on side of the Detector Window Center which is toward
the Table.

XF – XR = –0.06” 0.03” Record XF _________________

F4879X Page 3 of 12
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HHS Data Record for HSA & CT/i
REV 4 DIRECTION 46–000030F4879X

(–1.5mm 0.8mm) Record XR _________________


Subtract _________________

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Inst. Tube
Completed: -
ÇÇÇÇÇ
Radial Alignment

ÇÇÇÇÇ
Det. Col.

Average Centroid at pin scan: Spec: 376.4 2 channels,


if it is within limits, then no adjustment is needed.

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Inst. Tube P.M.

Det. Col.
HV
Tank
Tube Signal/Noise Output Check Completed: -

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
Inst. Tube
Isocenter Completed: -
Det. Col.

Avg. of Large and Small Focal Spots: Spec: 373.75 0.02

ÇÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
Inst. Tube
Completed: -

ÇÇ
Center Body Filter (CBF)
Det. Col.

Adjust CBF Value: Spec: 373.75 0.2

ÇÇÇÇ
Inst. Tube P.M.
VERIFICATION OF HV TANK FEEDBACK RESISTORS *HHS REQUIREMENT

ÇÇÇÇ
HV
Tank
(Formerly, Calibration of HV Tank Feedback Resistors) Initials: _______________

1. Using KV Test (Only if KV test baseline available) fill in chart: Verification of total kV

Nominal kV Expected Measured % Deviation 1%


100

OR
2. Using HV Divider and Oscilloscope
Anode and Cathode

F4879X Page 4 of 12
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HHS Data Record for HSA & CT/i
REV 4 DIRECTION 46–000030F4879X

Technic Anode Divider Displayed Anode KV Delta KV Limits +/– KV


100/50L 0.5

Technic Cathode Divider Displayed Cathode KV Delta KV Limits +/– KV


100/50L 0.5

Anode Divider – Displayed Anode = delta KV


Cathode Divider – Displayed Cathode = delta KV
Compare delta KVs to limits.
Anode and Cathode computer displayed readings have a limit of 50.0 +/– 0.5 KV.
Total KV

Technic Cathode and Anode Di- Displayed Total KV Delta KV Limits +/– KV
vider
100/50L 1.5

(Cathode & Anode Divider) – Displayed Total KV = delta KV


Compare delta KV to limits
KV Meter Verification

Circuit OFF Circuit ON


DVM A/D Delta Limits +/– DVM A/D Delta Limits+/–
Anode KV 0.0 0.5 Anode KV 50.0 7.5
Cathode KV 0.0 0.5 Cathode KV 50.0 7.5
Total KV 0.0 0.5 Total KV 100.0 15.0
Anode mA : : : 0.5 Anode mA : : : 4.5
Cathode mA : : : 0.5 Cathode mA : : : 4.5

DVM – A/D = Delta : Ignore these values at this time.


Compare Delta to Limits

ÇÇÇÇ
Inst. Tube P.M.
Auto mA Cal Completed: -

ÇÇÇÇ
Det. Col. HV
Tank

F4879X Page 5 of 12
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HHS Data Record for HSA & CT/i

ÇÇ
REV 4 DIRECTION 46–000030F4879X

ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
Inst. Tube P.M.
KV and mA VERIFICATION DATA SHEET * HHS REQUIREMENT

ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
Det. Col. HV
Tank

Data sheet complete and meets specification Initials: _________________


(attach print out/film from system if available)

SMALL FOCAL SPOT TECHNIC


Spec Lim-
At 5ms its Cathode Anode Spec Limits for
KV mA KV mA for mA at KV mA KV mA Total Total KV Cathode mA
5ms KV
80 40 34–44 78.4–81.6 36.2–43.8
70 59–77 78.4–81.6 65.6–74.4
100 85–110 78.4–81.6 95.0–105
150 128–165 78.4–81.6 144–156
200 170–220 78.4–81.6 193–207
300 255–330 78.4–81.6 291–309
100 40 34–44 98–102 36.2–43.8
70 59–77 98–102 65.6–74.4
100 85–110 98–102 95.0–105
150 128–165 98–102 144–156
200 170–220 98–102 193–207
240 204–264 98–102 232.2–247.8
120 40 34–44 117.6–122.4 36.2–43.8
70 59–77 117.6–122.4 65.6–74.4
100 85–110 117.6–122.4 95.0–105
150 128–165 117.6–122.4 114–156
200 170–220 117.6–122.4 193–207
140 40 34–44 137.2–142.8 36.2–43.8
70 59–77 137.2–142.8 65.6–74.4
100 85–110 137.2–142.8 95.0–105
130 110–143 137.2–142.8 124.4–135.6
170 144–187 137.2–142.8 163.6–176.4

Since the MX200 tube uses a metal / ceramic frame, some of the electrons hitting the target actually bounce
off and are captured by the frame. This causes a frame current and the resultant measured anode mA is
slightly less than the cathode mA. Typically this difference is between 5 & 10%. The cathode mA is the true
indicator of radiation output. Because of this difference, the CT/i system has been changed to control cathode
mA rather than anode mA, as originally designed.

F4879X Page 6 of 12
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HHS Data Record for HSA & CT/i

ÇÇ
REV 4 DIRECTION 46–000030F4879X

ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
Inst. Tube P.M. * HHS REQUIREMENT
KV and mA VERIFICATION DATA SHEET (CONTINUED)

ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
Det. Col. HV
Tank

Data sheet complete and meets specification Initials: _________________


(attach print out/film from system if available)

LARGE FOCAL SPOT TECHNIC


Spec Lim-
At 5ms its Cathode Anode Spec Limits for
KV mA KV mA for mA at KV mA KV mA Total Total KV Cathode mA
5ms KV
80 40 34–44 78.4–81.6 36.2–43.8
70 59–77 78.4–81.6 65.6–74.4
100 85–110 78.4–81.6 95.0–105
200 170–220 78.4–81.6 193–207
300 255–330 78.4–81.6 291–309
400 340–440 78.4–81.6 389–411
100 40 34–44 98–102 36.2–43.8
70 59–77 98–102 65.6–74.4
100 85–110 98–102 95.0–105
200 170–220 98–102 193–207
300 255–330 98–102 291–309
## 400 340–440 98–102 389–411
## 420 357–462 98–102 408–432
120 40 34–44 117.6–122.4 36.2–43.8
70 59–77 117.6–122.4 65.6–74.4
100 85–110 117.6–122.4 95.0–105
200 170–220 117.6–122.4 193–207
300 255–330 117.6–122.4 291–309
400 340–440 117.6–122.4 389–411
140 40 34–44 137.2–142.8 36.2–43.8
70 59–77 137.2–142.8 65.6–74.4
100 85–110 137.2–142.8 95.0–105
200 170–220 137.2–142.8 193–207
300 255–330 137.2–142.8 291–309
340 289–374 137.2–142.8 330.2–349.8

## Note: 100kV, 400mA is used as the test point for MX165 tube, the MX200 tube uses 100kV, 420mA.

F4879X Page 7 of 12
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HHS Data Record for HSA & CT/i

ÇÇÇÇÇ
REV 4 DIRECTION 46–000030F4879X

ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
Inst. Tube P.M.
RISE AND FALL TIMES * HHS REQUIREMENT Initials:

ÇÇÇÇÇ
_________________

Technic
KV mA Rise Delay ms Limit Fall Delay ms Limit
80 400 0 +1.9ms Not Applicable
140 40 Not Applicable 0 +2ms

ÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
Inst. Tube P.M.

ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
VERIFICATION OF INTERNAL SCAN TIMER * HHS REQUIREMENT Initials:

ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
_________________

Technic
KV mA Oscilloscope Expo- Limit Displayed Exposure Limit
sure Duration Duration
100 40 0.96–1.04 sec 0.99–1.02 sec

ÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
Inst. Tube P.M. * HHS REQUIREMENT
EXPOSURE TIME ACCURACY Initials:

ÇÇÇÇÇ
_________________
Scout Scans

Technic Distance Displayed Exposure Duration Limit


20 mm 0.258 – 0.278
150 mm 1.98 – 2.04
600 mm 7.920 – 8.095

Axial Scans

Technic Time Displayed Exposure Duration Limit


0.6 Large FOV 0.605 – 0.655
1.0 0.960 – 1.04
4.0 3.84 – 4.16

Helical Scan

Technic Duration Displayed Exposure Duration Limit


30 sec 28.8 – 31.2

F4879X Page 8 of 12
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HHS Data Record for HSA & CT/i

ÇÇÇ
REV 4 DIRECTION 46–000030F4879X

ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
Inst. Tube P.M.
OPERATOR INDICATORS * HHS REQUIREMENT Initials:

ÇÇÇÇÇ
_________________

ÇÇÇ
X–Ray Indicators on Front and Back of Gantry Illuminate During X–Ray

ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
Inst. Tube P.M. * HHS REQUIREMENT

ÇÇÇÇÇ
X–RAY BEAM LOCATION Initials: _________________

Tomo Plane Indication Accuracy


Refer to system service manual and verify that the relationship of the alignment lights to the x–ray beam is
compliant.
S Internal Lights (1mm)
S External Lights (1mm)
S All align. lights are visible with room lights at max. settings.

IMAGE PERFORMANCE

ÇÇ
Det. Col.
ÇÇ
Inst. Tube
HV
Tank
Z–Axis Correction (Formerly QCAL) Completed: -

1. If Z–Align was used for ‘Z’ Axis Alignment: No QCAL is necessary. (go to Image Calibration, step A)

OR
2. Q–CAL completed In Specification. Adjusted In Specification. (go to Image Calibration, step B)

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Inst. Tube

Det. Col.
HV
Image Calibration Completed: -
Tank

1. If Z–Align was used for ‘Z’ Axis Alignment: Only Air Calibrations are necessary.

OR
2. Air and Phantom Calibrations completed and ‘N’ Number adjustment completed.
The Number of Phantom Cals will vary depending on Site Specific scanning protocols.

F4879X Page 9 of 12
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HHS Data Record for HSA & CT/i

ÇÇ
REV 4 DIRECTION 46–000030F4879X

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Inst. Tube *HHS REQUIREMENT
IMAGE QUALITY CHECK Initials: _________________
HV
Det. Col.
Tank

48cm Large – Peristaltic On


Scan at maximum 120 KV technique, one of either:
48cm/LargeSFOV/120/400/10/4sec/1slice
48cm/LargeSFOV/120/300/10/4sec/1slice
Visual inspection for Rings and bands. Cupping per chart below.
Visual results acceptable?....................................................... Yes: -
ROI box size: 45 x 45 pixels at locations:
255, 255 255, 59 255, 451 451, 255 59, 255

AvXo Xc AvXo – Xc AvSDo


less than 8.5 cts less than 14.0@400mA
less than 16.2@300mA

MTF – Peristaltic On
Small Focal Spot (120kv/170ma/2sec) 0.68 __________ 1.00
(4 slice average)
Large Focal Spot (120kv/340ma/1sec) 0.65 __________ 1.00
(4 slice average)

 
 

Contrast Scale = mean of B–mean of C.



SD = SD of ROI Box over F slits.
  
SD
 = (SD + SC ) /2



Modulation = SD AĂ Ă2 ćSD aveĂ Ă2
 MTF = 2.2 (Modulation/Contrast Scale)


2723

Unusual Aliasing, Other Artifacts


Visual inspection for unusual aliasing, and other artifacts.
(QA#1 (bars)/Small SFOV/120kv/170ma/10mm/2sec/1slice
Visual results acceptable?....................................................... Yes: -

F4879X Page 10 of 12
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HHS Data Record for HSA & CT/i
REV 4 DIRECTION 46–000030F4879X

CT Number Check, Noise Check, Cupping Check


Visual inspection for Rings and bands. Cupping per chart below.
QA#3 (water)/Small SFOV/120/170/10/2sec/1slice
Visual results acceptable?....................................................... Yes: -
ROI box size: 45 x 45 pixels at locations:
255, 255 255, 59 255, 451 451, 255 59, 255

AvXo Xc AvXo – Xc SDc


0.0 1.5 cts less than 2.0 cts greater than 3.00
less than 3.60(3.80)*

*If the tube has > 5000 scans on it, the upper standard deviation spec is 3.80, rather than 3.60.

CT Number Check Medium*


* Not applicable for RP
Check CT# at center.
QA#3 (water)/Medium* SFOV/120/170/10/2sec/1 slice/25cm DFOV
ROI box size: 14cm x 14cm at locations:
255, 255

––– Xc ––– –––


0.0 1.5
––– ––– –––

CT Number Check Large


Check CT# at center.
QA#3 (water)/Large SFOV/120/170/10/2sec/1 slice/25cm DFOV
ROI box size: 14cm x 14cm pixels at locations:
255, 255

––– Xc ––– –––


0.0 1.5
––– ––– –––

ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
Inst. Tube
Completed: -
ÇÇÇÇÇ
Heat Soak / Seasoning

ÇÇÇÇÇ
COLLIMATOR CHANGE
–––required test data – Z axis detector alignment Polaroid
–––Form 2579 – submit immediately

F4879X Page 11 of 12
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS HHS Data Record for HSA & CT/i
REV 4 DIRECTION 46–000030F4879X

NOTES

F4879X Page 12 of 12

You might also like